Home | History | Annotate | Download | only in info
      1 This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
      2 
      3 START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      4 * Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
      5 END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
      6 
      7    This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.18.90.
      8 
      9    Copyright (C) 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
     10 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
     11 
     12    Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
     13 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
     14 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
     15 Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
     16 Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
     17 Free Documentation License".
     18 
     19 
     20 File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
     21 
     22 LD
     23 **
     24 
     25 This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.18.90.
     26 
     27    This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
     28 Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
     29 section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
     30 
     31 * Menu:
     32 
     33 * Overview::                    Overview
     34 * Invocation::                  Invocation
     35 * Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
     36 
     37 * Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
     38 
     39 * BFD::                         BFD
     40 
     41 * Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
     42 * MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
     43 * GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
     44 * LD Index::                       LD Index
     45 
     46 
     47 File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
     48 
     49 1 Overview
     50 **********
     51 
     52 `ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
     53 data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
     54 a program is to run `ld'.
     55 
     56    `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
     57 AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
     58 total control over the linking process.
     59 
     60    This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
     61 operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
     62 object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
     63 Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
     64 of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
     65 
     66    Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
     67 linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
     68 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
     69 `ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
     70 some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
     71 
     72 
     73 File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
     74 
     75 2 Invocation
     76 ************
     77 
     78 The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
     79 to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
     80 have many choices to control its behavior.
     81 
     82 * Menu:
     83 
     84 * Options::                     Command Line Options
     85 * Environment::                 Environment Variables
     86 
     87 
     88 File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
     89 
     90 2.1 Command Line Options
     91 ========================
     92 
     93    The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
     94 practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
     95 a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
     96 standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
     97 `hello.o':
     98 
     99      ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
    100 
    101    This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
    102 linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
    103 which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
    104 discussion of the `-l' option below.)
    105 
    106    Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
    107 point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
    108 as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
    109 option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
    110 other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
    111 argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
    112 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
    113 option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
    114 noted in the descriptions below.
    115 
    116    Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
    117 linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
    118 command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
    119 placed between an option and its argument.
    120 
    121    Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
    122 can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
    123 script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
    124 specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
    125 message `No input files'.
    126 
    127    If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
    128 assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
    129 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
    130 linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
    131 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
    132 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
    133 `INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
    134 way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
    135 placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
    136 default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
    137 command.  *Note Scripts::.
    138 
    139    For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
    140 either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
    141 given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
    142 requires them.
    143 
    144    For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
    145 can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
    146 `--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
    147 rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
    148 only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
    149 `-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
    150 `magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
    151 
    152    Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
    153 the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
    154 immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
    155 `--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
    156 abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
    157 
    158    Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
    159 driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
    160 prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
    161 compiler driver) like this:
    162 
    163        gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
    164 
    165    This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
    166 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
    167 
    168    Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
    169 GNU linker:
    170 
    171 `@FILE'
    172      Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
    173      inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
    174      exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
    175      literally, and not removed.
    176 
    177      Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
    178      character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
    179      option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
    180      (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
    181      to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
    182      additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
    183      recursively.
    184 
    185 `-aKEYWORD'
    186      This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
    187      argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
    188      `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
    189      and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
    190      `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
    191 
    192 `-AARCHITECTURE'
    193 `--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
    194      In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
    195      Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
    196      ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
    197      the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
    198      archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
    199      i960, for details.
    200 
    201      Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
    202      other architecture families.
    203 
    204 `-b INPUT-FORMAT'
    205 `--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
    206      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
    207      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
    208      option to specify the binary format for input object files that
    209      follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
    210      configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
    211      usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
    212      expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
    213      machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
    214      format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
    215      available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
    216 
    217      You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
    218      unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
    219      explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
    220      including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
    221      particular format.
    222 
    223      The default format is taken from the environment variable
    224      `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
    225      format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
    226      Commands::.
    227 
    228 `-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    229 `--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
    230      For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
    231      files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
    232      described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
    233      MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
    234      linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
    235      language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
    236      directories specified by any `-L' options.
    237 
    238 `-d'
    239 `-dc'
    240 `-dp'
    241      These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
    242      for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
    243      symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
    244      `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
    245      effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    246 
    247 `-e ENTRY'
    248 `--entry=ENTRY'
    249      Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
    250      program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
    251      symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
    252      and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
    253      in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
    254      `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
    255      and other ways of specifying the entry point.
    256 
    257 `--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
    258      Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
    259      not be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited
    260      by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
    261      symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
    262      option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
    263      linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
    264      explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
    265      this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
    266      option will be treated as hidden.
    267 
    268 `-E'
    269 `--export-dynamic'
    270      When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to
    271      the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table is the set of
    272      symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
    273 
    274      If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will
    275      normally contain only those symbols which are referenced by some
    276      dynamic object mentioned in the link.
    277 
    278      If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
    279      back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
    280      dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
    281      linking the program itself.
    282 
    283      You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
    284      be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
    285      it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
    286 
    287 `-EB'
    288      Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
    289 
    290 `-EL'
    291      Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
    292      format.
    293 
    294 `-f'
    295 `--auxiliary NAME'
    296      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
    297      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    298      the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
    299      auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
    300 
    301      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    302      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
    303      field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
    304      object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
    305      shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
    306      the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
    307      not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
    308      alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
    309      debugging or for machine specific performance.
    310 
    311      This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
    312      entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
    313      command line.
    314 
    315 `-F NAME'
    316 `--filter NAME'
    317      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
    318      field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
    319      the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
    320      should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
    321      object NAME.
    322 
    323      If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
    324      you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
    325      field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
    326      symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
    327      link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
    328      filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
    329      provided by the object NAME.
    330 
    331      Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
    332      toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
    333      output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
    334      this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
    335      `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
    336      environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
    337      when not creating an ELF shared object.
    338 
    339 `-fini NAME'
    340      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    341      the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
    342      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
    343      as the function to call.
    344 
    345 `-g'
    346      Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
    347 
    348 `-GVALUE'
    349 `--gpsize=VALUE'
    350      Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
    351      register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
    352      such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
    353      into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
    354      formats.
    355 
    356 `-hNAME'
    357 `-soname=NAME'
    358      When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
    359      field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
    360      shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
    361      executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
    362      shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
    363      using the file name given to the linker.
    364 
    365 `-i'
    366      Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
    367 
    368 `-init NAME'
    369      When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
    370      the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
    371      the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
    372      as the function to call.
    373 
    374 `-lNAMESPEC'
    375 `--library=NAMESPEC'
    376      Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
    377      of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
    378      If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
    379      library path for a file called FILENAME, otherise it will search
    380      the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    381 
    382      On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
    383      files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
    384      systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
    385      `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
    386      (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
    387      Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
    388      always specifies a file called FILENAME.
    389 
    390      The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
    391      it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
    392      symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
    393      the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
    394      appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
    395      symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
    396      cause the linker to search the archive again.
    397 
    398      See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
    399      archives multiple times.
    400 
    401      You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
    402 
    403      This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
    404      However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
    405      from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
    406 
    407 `-LSEARCHDIR'
    408 `--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
    409      Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
    410      archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
    411      option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
    412      order in which they are specified on the command line.
    413      Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
    414      default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
    415      regardless of the order in which the options appear.
    416 
    417      If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
    418      "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
    419 
    420      The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
    421      `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
    422      cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
    423 
    424      The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
    425      `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
    426      at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
    427      line.
    428 
    429 `-mEMULATION'
    430      Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
    431      emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
    432 
    433      If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
    434      `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
    435 
    436      Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
    437      configured.
    438 
    439 `-M'
    440 `--print-map'
    441      Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
    442      information about the link, including the following:
    443 
    444         * Where object files are mapped into memory.
    445 
    446         * How common symbols are allocated.
    447 
    448         * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
    449           the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
    450 
    451         * The values assigned to symbols.
    452 
    453           Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
    454           which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
    455           symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
    456           This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
    457           only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
    458           circumstances the linker will display the final value
    459           enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
    460           script containing:
    461 
    462                   foo = 1
    463                   foo = foo * 4
    464                   foo = foo + 8
    465 
    466           will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
    467           option is used:
    468 
    469                   0x00000001                foo = 0x1
    470                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
    471                   [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
    472 
    473           See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
    474           expressions in linker scripts.
    475 
    476 `-n'
    477 `--nmagic'
    478      Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
    479      `NMAGIC' if possible.
    480 
    481 `-N'
    482 `--omagic'
    483      Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
    484      do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
    485      shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
    486      numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
    487      text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
    488      to the format specification published by Microsoft.
    489 
    490 `--no-omagic'
    491      This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
    492      sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
    493      to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
    494      against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
    495 
    496 `-o OUTPUT'
    497 `--output=OUTPUT'
    498      Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
    499      option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
    500      script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
    501 
    502 `-O LEVEL'
    503      If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
    504      output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
    505      probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
    506      moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
    507      Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
    508      Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
    509      for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
    510      change with future releases.
    511 
    512 `-q'
    513 `--emit-relocs'
    514      Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
    515      Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
    516      information in order to perform correct modifications of
    517      executables.  This results in larger executables.
    518 
    519      This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
    520 
    521 `--force-dynamic'
    522      Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
    523      specific to VxWorks targets.
    524 
    525 `-r'
    526 `--relocatable'
    527      Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
    528      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
    529      linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
    530      Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
    531      number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
    532      file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
    533      not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
    534 
    535      When an input file does not have the same format as the output
    536      file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
    537      not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
    538      further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
    539      not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
    540      all.
    541 
    542      This option does the same thing as `-i'.
    543 
    544 `-R FILENAME'
    545 `--just-symbols=FILENAME'
    546      Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
    547      relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
    548      file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
    549      in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
    550 
    551      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
    552      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
    553      treated as the `-rpath' option.
    554 
    555 `-s'
    556 `--strip-all'
    557      Omit all symbol information from the output file.
    558 
    559 `-S'
    560 `--strip-debug'
    561      Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
    562      output file.
    563 
    564 `-t'
    565 `--trace'
    566      Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
    567 
    568 `-T SCRIPTFILE'
    569 `--script=SCRIPTFILE'
    570      Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
    571      default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
    572      must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
    573      *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
    574      directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
    575      preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
    576 
    577 `-dT SCRIPTFILE'
    578 `--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
    579      Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
    580 
    581      This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
    582      processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
    583      command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
    584      the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
    585      behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
    586      linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
    587      (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
    588      such as `gcc').
    589 
    590 `-u SYMBOL'
    591 `--undefined=SYMBOL'
    592      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
    593      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
    594      modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
    595      different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
    596      This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
    597 
    598 `-Ur'
    599      For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
    600      `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
    601      can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
    602      `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
    603      does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
    604      with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
    605      be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
    606      for the others.
    607 
    608 `--unique[=SECTION]'
    609      Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
    610      SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
    611      for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
    612      specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
    613      multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
    614      merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
    615      section assignments in a linker script.
    616 
    617 `-v'
    618 `--version'
    619 `-V'
    620      Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
    621      the supported emulations.
    622 
    623 `-x'
    624 `--discard-all'
    625      Delete all local symbols.
    626 
    627 `-X'
    628 `--discard-locals'
    629      Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
    630      system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
    631      systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
    632 
    633 `-y SYMBOL'
    634 `--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
    635      Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
    636      option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
    637      necessary to prepend an underscore.
    638 
    639      This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
    640      link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
    641 
    642 `-Y PATH'
    643      Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
    644      for Solaris compatibility.
    645 
    646 `-z KEYWORD'
    647      The recognized keywords are:
    648     `combreloc'
    649           Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
    650           dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
    651 
    652     `defs'
    653           Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
    654           symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
    655 
    656     `execstack'
    657           Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
    658 
    659     `initfirst'
    660           This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
    661           It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
    662           occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
    663           brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
    664           runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
    665           runtime finalization of any other objects.
    666 
    667     `interpose'
    668           Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
    669           symbols but the primary executable.
    670 
    671     `lazy'
    672           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    673           tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
    674           the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
    675           than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
    676 
    677     `loadfltr'
    678           Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
    679           runtime.
    680 
    681     `muldefs'
    682           Allows multiple definitions.
    683 
    684     `nocombreloc'
    685           Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
    686 
    687     `nocopyreloc'
    688           Disables production of copy relocs.
    689 
    690     `nodefaultlib'
    691           Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
    692           object will ignore any default library search paths.
    693 
    694     `nodelete'
    695           Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
    696 
    697     `nodlopen'
    698           Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
    699 
    700     `nodump'
    701           Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
    702 
    703     `noexecstack'
    704           Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
    705 
    706     `norelro'
    707           Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
    708           object.
    709 
    710     `now'
    711           When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
    712           tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
    713           program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
    714           using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
    715           to the point when the function is first called.
    716 
    717     `origin'
    718           Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
    719 
    720     `relro'
    721           Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
    722 
    723     `max-page-size=VALUE'
    724           Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
    725 
    726     `common-page-size=VALUE'
    727           Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
    728 
    729 
    730      Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
    731 
    732 `-( ARCHIVES -)'
    733 `--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
    734      The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
    735      either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
    736 
    737      The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
    738      undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
    739      searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
    740      command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
    741      undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
    742      appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
    743      resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
    744      searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
    745 
    746      Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
    747      to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
    748      between two or more archives.
    749 
    750 `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    751 `--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
    752      Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
    753      recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
    754      doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
    755      This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
    756      2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
    757      reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
    758      option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
    759 
    760 `--as-needed'
    761 `--no-as-needed'
    762      This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
    763      mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
    764      Normally, the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
    765      library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
    766      library is actually needed.  `--as-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags
    767      to only be emitted for libraries that satisfy some symbol
    768      reference from regular objects which is undefined at the point
    769      that the library was linked.  `--no-as-needed' restores the
    770      default behaviour.
    771 
    772 `--add-needed'
    773 `--no-add-needed'
    774      This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
    775      DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line
    776      after the `--no-add-needed' option.  Normally, the linker will add
    777      a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
    778      `--no-add-needed' causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted for
    779      those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. `--add-needed' restores the
    780      default behaviour.
    781 
    782 `-assert KEYWORD'
    783      This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
    784 
    785 `-Bdynamic'
    786 `-dy'
    787 `-call_shared'
    788      Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    789      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
    790      is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
    791      of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
    792      may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
    793      library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
    794 
    795 `-Bgroup'
    796      Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
    797      section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
    798      object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
    799      `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
    800      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    801 
    802 `-Bstatic'
    803 `-dn'
    804 `-non_shared'
    805 `-static'
    806      Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
    807      platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
    808      variants of this option are for compatibility with various
    809      systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
    810      line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
    811      it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
    812      This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
    813      shared library is being created but that all of the library's
    814      external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
    815      static libraries.
    816 
    817 `-Bsymbolic'
    818      When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
    819      to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
    820      is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
    821      override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
    822      only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    823 
    824 `-Bsymbolic-functions'
    825      When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
    826      symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
    827      option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
    828      libraries.
    829 
    830 `--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
    831      Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
    832      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
    833      global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
    834      definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
    835      linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
    836      added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
    837      meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
    838 
    839      The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
    840      without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
    841      information.
    842 
    843 `--dynamic-list-data'
    844      Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
    845 
    846 `--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
    847      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
    848      It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
    849 
    850 `--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
    851      Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
    852      identification.
    853 
    854 `--check-sections'
    855 `--no-check-sections'
    856      Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
    857      been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
    858      linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
    859      will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
    860      and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
    861      behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
    862      `--check-sections'.
    863 
    864 `--cref'
    865      Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
    866      generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
    867      Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
    868 
    869      The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
    870      easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
    871      printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
    872      names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
    873      is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
    874      references to the symbol.
    875 
    876 `--no-define-common'
    877      This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
    878      The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
    879      *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
    880 
    881      The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
    882      assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
    883      file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
    884      assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
    885      allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
    886      be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
    887      the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
    888      prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
    889      duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
    890      search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
    891 
    892 `--defsym SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
    893      Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
    894      address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
    895      times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
    896      A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
    897      this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
    898      an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
    899      hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
    900      expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
    901      script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
    902      _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
    903      sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
    904 
    905 `--demangle[=STYLE]'
    906 `--no-demangle'
    907      These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
    908      messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
    909      it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
    910      leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
    911      and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
    912      Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
    913      demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
    914      demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
    915      default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
    916      set.  These options may be used to override the default.
    917 
    918 `--dynamic-linker FILE'
    919      Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
    920      generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
    921      linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
    922      you are doing.
    923 
    924 `--fatal-warnings'
    925 `--no-fatal-warnings'
    926      Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
    927      restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
    928 
    929 `--force-exe-suffix'
    930      Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
    931 
    932      If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
    933      `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
    934      output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
    935      option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
    936      Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
    937      an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
    938 
    939 `--gc-sections'
    940 `--no-gc-sections'
    941      Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
    942      on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
    943      (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
    944      specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
    945 
    946      `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
    947      symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
    948      and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
    949      will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
    950      dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
    951      linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
    952      this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
    953      recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
    954      relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
    955 
    956      This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
    957      option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
    958      explicitely specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
    959      option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
    960 
    961 `--print-gc-sections'
    962 `--no-print-gc-sections'
    963      List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
    964      printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
    965      collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
    966      default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
    967      can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
    968      command line.
    969 
    970 `--help'
    971      Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
    972      and exit.
    973 
    974 `--target-help'
    975      Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
    976      output and exit.
    977 
    978 `-Map MAPFILE'
    979      Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
    980      `-M' option, above.
    981 
    982 `--no-keep-memory'
    983      `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
    984      symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
    985      instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
    986      as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
    987      space while linking a large executable.
    988 
    989 `--no-undefined'
    990 `-z defs'
    991      Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
    992      This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
    993      library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
    994      behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
    995      libraries being linked in.
    996 
    997 `--allow-multiple-definition'
    998 `-z muldefs'
    999      Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
   1000      report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
   1001      the first definition will be used.
   1002 
   1003 `--allow-shlib-undefined'
   1004 `--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
   1005      Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared
   1006      libraries.  This switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that
   1007      it determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
   1008      shared library rather than a regular object file.  It does not
   1009      affect how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
   1010 
   1011      The reason that `--allow-shlib-undefined' is the default is that
   1012      the shared library being specified at link time may not be the
   1013      same as the one that is available at load time, so the symbols
   1014      might actually be resolvable at load time.  Plus there are some
   1015      systems, (eg BeOS) where undefined symbols in shared libraries is
   1016      normal.  (The kernel patches them at load time to select which
   1017      function is most appropriate for the current architecture.  This
   1018      is used for example to dynamically select an appropriate memset
   1019      function).  Apparently it is also normal for HPPA shared libraries
   1020      to have undefined symbols.
   1021 
   1022 `--no-undefined-version'
   1023      Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
   1024      ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
   1025      and a fatal error will be issued instead.
   1026 
   1027 `--default-symver'
   1028      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1029      unversioned exported symbols.
   1030 
   1031 `--default-imported-symver'
   1032      Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
   1033      unversioned imported symbols.
   1034 
   1035 `--no-warn-mismatch'
   1036      Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
   1037      files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
   1038      have been compiled for different processors or for different
   1039      endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
   1040      permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
   1041      care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
   1042      ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
   1043 
   1044 `--no-warn-search-mismatch'
   1045      Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
   1046      library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
   1047 
   1048 `--no-whole-archive'
   1049      Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
   1050      archive files.
   1051 
   1052 `--noinhibit-exec'
   1053      Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
   1054      Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
   1055      encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
   1056      writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
   1057 
   1058 `-nostdlib'
   1059      Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
   1060      command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
   1061      (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
   1062      ignored.
   1063 
   1064 `--oformat OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   1065      `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
   1066      file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
   1067      `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
   1068      object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
   1069      object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
   1070      should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
   1071      usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
   1072      name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
   1073      can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
   1074      script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
   1075      but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
   1076 
   1077 `-pie'
   1078 `--pic-executable'
   1079      Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
   1080      supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
   1081      similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
   1082      dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
   1083      (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
   1084      linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
   1085      executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
   1086 
   1087 `-qmagic'
   1088      This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
   1089 
   1090 `-Qy'
   1091      This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
   1092 
   1093 `--relax'
   1094      An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
   1095      supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
   1096      *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
   1097      Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
   1098      M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
   1099      PowerPC ELF32.
   1100 
   1101      On some platforms, the `--relax' option performs global
   1102      optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
   1103      addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes and
   1104      synthesizing new instructions in the output object file.
   1105 
   1106      On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
   1107      symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
   1108      is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
   1109      family of processors.
   1110 
   1111      On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
   1112      but ignored.
   1113 
   1114 `--retain-symbols-file FILENAME'
   1115      Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
   1116      all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
   1117      per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
   1118      as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
   1119      gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
   1120 
   1121      `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
   1122      symbols needed for relocations.
   1123 
   1124      You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
   1125      line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
   1126 
   1127 `-rpath DIR'
   1128      Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
   1129      when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
   1130      arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
   1131      uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
   1132      option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
   1133      by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
   1134      description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
   1135      when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
   1136      variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
   1137 
   1138      The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
   1139      SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
   1140      `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
   1141      runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
   1142      options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
   1143      gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
   1144      systems.
   1145 
   1146      For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
   1147      followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
   1148      treated as the `-rpath' option.
   1149 
   1150 `-rpath-link DIR'
   1151      When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
   1152      This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
   1153      as one of the input files.
   1154 
   1155      When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
   1156      non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
   1157      locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
   1158      it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
   1159      option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
   1160      `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
   1161      either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
   1162      appearing multiple times.
   1163 
   1164      This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
   1165      path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
   1166      such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
   1167      search path than the runtime linker would do.
   1168 
   1169      The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
   1170      shared libraries:
   1171        1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
   1172 
   1173        2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
   1174           between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
   1175           specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
   1176           and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
   1177           effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
   1178           only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
   1179           been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
   1180 
   1181        3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
   1182           `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
   1183           the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
   1184 
   1185        4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
   1186           directories specified using `-L' options.
   1187 
   1188        5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
   1189           environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
   1190 
   1191        6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
   1192           `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
   1193           libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
   1194           `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
   1195 
   1196        7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
   1197 
   1198        8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
   1199           `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
   1200           that file.
   1201 
   1202      If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
   1203      a warning and continue with the link.
   1204 
   1205 `-shared'
   1206 `-Bshareable'
   1207      Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
   1208      XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
   1209      automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
   1210      used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
   1211 
   1212 `--sort-common [= ascending | descending]'
   1213      This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
   1214      ascending or descending order when it places them in the
   1215      appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
   1216      sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
   1217      one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
   1218      constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
   1219      order is assumed.
   1220 
   1221 `--sort-section name'
   1222      This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
   1223      patterns in the linker script.
   1224 
   1225 `--sort-section alignment'
   1226      This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
   1227      patterns in the linker script.
   1228 
   1229 `--split-by-file [SIZE]'
   1230      Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
   1231      each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
   1232      1 if not given.
   1233 
   1234 `--split-by-reloc [COUNT]'
   1235      Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
   1236      single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
   1237      relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
   1238      files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
   1239      object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
   1240      relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
   1241      with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
   1242      The linker will not split up individual input sections for
   1243      redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
   1244      COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
   1245      relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
   1246 
   1247 `--stats'
   1248      Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
   1249      such as execution time and memory usage.
   1250 
   1251 `--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
   1252      Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
   1253      configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
   1254      that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
   1255 
   1256 `--traditional-format'
   1257      For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
   1258      the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
   1259      use the traditional format instead.
   1260 
   1261      For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
   1262      symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
   1263      with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
   1264      Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
   1265      program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
   1266      tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
   1267 
   1268 `--section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG'
   1269      Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
   1270      by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
   1271      locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
   1272      single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
   1273      you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
   1274      values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
   1275      SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
   1276 
   1277 `-Tbss ORG'
   1278 `-Tdata ORG'
   1279 `-Ttext ORG'
   1280      Same as -section-start, with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
   1281      SECTIONNAME.
   1282 
   1283 `--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
   1284      Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
   1285      possible values for `method':
   1286 
   1287     `ignore-all'
   1288           Do not report any unresolved symbols.
   1289 
   1290     `report-all'
   1291           Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
   1292 
   1293     `ignore-in-object-files'
   1294           Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
   1295           libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
   1296           files.
   1297 
   1298     `ignore-in-shared-libs'
   1299           Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
   1300           files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
   1301           This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
   1302           known that all the shared libraries that it should be
   1303           referencing are included on the linker's command line.
   1304 
   1305      The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
   1306      controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
   1307 
   1308      Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
   1309      reported unresolved symbol but the option
   1310      `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
   1311 
   1312 `--dll-verbose'
   1313 `--verbose'
   1314      Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
   1315      supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
   1316      Display the linker script being used by the linker.
   1317 
   1318 `--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
   1319      Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
   1320      typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
   1321      additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
   1322      being created.  This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
   1323      which support shared libraries.  *Note VERSION::.
   1324 
   1325 `--warn-common'
   1326      Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
   1327      or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
   1328      sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
   1329      not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
   1330      combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
   1331      this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
   1332      libraries as well as in your programs.
   1333 
   1334      There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
   1335      examples:
   1336 
   1337     `int i = 1;'
   1338           A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
   1339           the output file.
   1340 
   1341     `extern int i;'
   1342           An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
   1343           must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
   1344           variable somewhere.
   1345 
   1346     `int i;'
   1347           A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
   1348           symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
   1349           area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
   1350           symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
   1351           are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
   1352           linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
   1353           a definition of the same variable.
   1354 
   1355      The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
   1356      Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
   1357      symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
   1358      symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
   1359      symbols will be a common symbol.
   1360 
   1361        1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
   1362           already a definition for the symbol.
   1363                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1364                   overridden by definition
   1365                FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
   1366 
   1367        2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
   1368           definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
   1369           as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
   1370           in a different order.
   1371                FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
   1372                   overriding common
   1373                FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
   1374 
   1375        3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
   1376           symbol.
   1377                FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
   1378                   of `SYMBOL'
   1379                FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
   1380 
   1381        4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
   1382                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1383                   overridden by larger common
   1384                FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
   1385 
   1386        5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
   1387           symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
   1388           the symbols are encountered in a different order.
   1389                FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
   1390                   overriding smaller common
   1391                FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
   1392 
   1393 `--warn-constructors'
   1394      Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
   1395      a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
   1396      linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
   1397 
   1398 `--warn-multiple-gp'
   1399      Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
   1400      file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
   1401      Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
   1402      in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
   1403      points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
   1404      loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
   1405      Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
   1406      relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
   1407      the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
   1408      to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
   1409      address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
   1410      be issued whenever this case occurs.
   1411 
   1412 `--warn-once'
   1413      Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
   1414      module which refers to it.
   1415 
   1416 `--warn-section-align'
   1417      Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
   1418      alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
   1419      section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
   1420      specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
   1421      start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
   1422 
   1423 `--warn-shared-textrel'
   1424      Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
   1425 
   1426 `--warn-unresolved-symbols'
   1427      If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
   1428      option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
   1429      This option makes it generate a warning instead.
   1430 
   1431 `--error-unresolved-symbols'
   1432      This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
   1433      when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
   1434 
   1435 `--whole-archive'
   1436      For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
   1437      `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
   1438      in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
   1439      object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
   1440      a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
   1441      resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
   1442 
   1443      Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
   1444      about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
   1445      Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
   1446      list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
   1447      your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
   1448 
   1449 `--wrap SYMBOL'
   1450      Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
   1451      SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
   1452      reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
   1453 
   1454      This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
   1455      wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
   1456      to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
   1457 
   1458      Here is a trivial example:
   1459 
   1460           void *
   1461           __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
   1462           {
   1463             printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
   1464             return __real_malloc (c);
   1465           }
   1466 
   1467      If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
   1468      all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
   1469      instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
   1470      the real `malloc' function.
   1471 
   1472      You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
   1473      links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
   1474      you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
   1475      file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
   1476      call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
   1477 
   1478 `--eh-frame-hdr'
   1479      Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
   1480      `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
   1481 
   1482 `--enable-new-dtags'
   1483 `--disable-new-dtags'
   1484      This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
   1485      ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
   1486      `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
   1487      If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
   1488      created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
   1489      that those options are only available for ELF systems.
   1490 
   1491 `--hash-size=NUMBER'
   1492      Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
   1493      close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
   1494      time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
   1495      increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
   1496      this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
   1497      speed.
   1498 
   1499 `--hash-style=STYLE'
   1500      Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
   1501      `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
   1502      `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
   1503      new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
   1504 
   1505 `--reduce-memory-overheads'
   1506      This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
   1507      expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
   1508      O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
   1509      O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
   1510 
   1511      Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
   1512      to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
   1513      linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
   1514      switch has been used.
   1515 
   1516      The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
   1517      enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
   1518 
   1519 `--build-id'
   1520 `--build-id=STYLE'
   1521      Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
   1522      contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
   1523      STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
   1524      160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
   1525      `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
   1526      output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
   1527      specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
   1528      characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
   1529      `sha1' is used.
   1530 
   1531      The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
   1532      the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
   1533      nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
   1534      checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
   1535      later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
   1536      original linked file does not change.
   1537 
   1538      Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
   1539      `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
   1540 
   1541 2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
   1542 -----------------------------------------
   1543 
   1544 The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
   1545 output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
   1546 executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
   1547 option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
   1548 files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
   1549 file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
   1550 ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
   1551 
   1552    In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
   1553 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
   1554 PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
   1555 by either a space or an equals sign.
   1556 
   1557 `--add-stdcall-alias'
   1558      If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
   1559      as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
   1560      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1561 
   1562 `--base-file FILE'
   1563      Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
   1564      of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
   1565      [This is an i386 PE specific option]
   1566 
   1567 `--dll'
   1568      Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
   1569      `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
   1570      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1571 
   1572 `--enable-stdcall-fixup'
   1573 `--disable-stdcall-fixup'
   1574      If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
   1575      to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
   1576      differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
   1577      and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
   1578      example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
   1579      function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
   1580      linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
   1581      prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
   1582      but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
   1583      need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
   1584      `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
   1585      warnings are not printed.  If you specify
   1586      `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
   1587      mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
   1588      to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1589 
   1590 `--export-all-symbols'
   1591      If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
   1592      will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
   1593      there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
   1594      explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
   1595      function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
   1596      unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
   1597      `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
   1598      not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
   1599      DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
   1600      DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
   1601      ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
   1602      `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
   1603      whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
   1604      exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
   1605      list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
   1606      this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
   1607      cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1608      `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
   1609      `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
   1610      `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
   1611      `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1612      of the linker]
   1613 
   1614 `--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
   1615      Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
   1616      exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
   1617      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1618      linker]
   1619 
   1620 `--file-alignment'
   1621      Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
   1622      begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
   1623      defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
   1624      port of the linker]
   1625 
   1626 `--heap RESERVE'
   1627 `--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1628      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1629      commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
   1630      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1631      targeted port of the linker]
   1632 
   1633 `--image-base VALUE'
   1634      Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
   1635      lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
   1636      is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
   1637      of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
   1638      overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
   1639      and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1640      targeted port of the linker]
   1641 
   1642 `--kill-at'
   1643      If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
   1644      before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1645      targeted port of the linker]
   1646 
   1647 `--large-address-aware'
   1648      If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
   1649      the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
   1650      virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
   1651      in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
   1652      the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
   1653      this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
   1654      ports of the linker]
   1655 
   1656 `--major-image-version VALUE'
   1657      Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
   1658      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1659      linker]
   1660 
   1661 `--major-os-version VALUE'
   1662      Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
   1663      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1664 
   1665 `--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1666      Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
   1667      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1668      linker]
   1669 
   1670 `--minor-image-version VALUE'
   1671      Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
   1672      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1673      linker]
   1674 
   1675 `--minor-os-version VALUE'
   1676      Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
   1677      option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1678 
   1679 `--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
   1680      Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
   1681      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1682      linker]
   1683 
   1684 `--output-def FILE'
   1685      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
   1686      corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
   1687      (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
   1688      library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
   1689      automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
   1690      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1691 
   1692 `--out-implib FILE'
   1693      The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
   1694      lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
   1695      lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
   1696      clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
   1697      possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
   1698      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1699      linker]
   1700 
   1701 `--enable-auto-image-base'
   1702      Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
   1703      specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
   1704      generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
   1705      DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
   1706      execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1707      targeted port of the linker]
   1708 
   1709 `--disable-auto-image-base'
   1710      Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
   1711      user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
   1712      default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1713      the linker]
   1714 
   1715 `--dll-search-prefix STRING'
   1716      When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
   1717      search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
   1718      `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
   1719      between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
   1720      uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
   1721      `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
   1722      PE targeted port of the linker]
   1723 
   1724 `--enable-auto-import'
   1725      Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
   1726      imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
   1727      building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
   1728      of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
   1729      image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
   1730      PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
   1731 
   1732      Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
   1733      data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
   1734      placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
   1735      around a problem with consts that is described here:
   1736      http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
   1737 
   1738      Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
   1739      may see this message:
   1740 
   1741      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   1742      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   1743 
   1744      This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
   1745      ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
   1746      only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
   1747      to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
   1748      as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
   1749      DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
   1750      trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
   1751      data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
   1752      detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
   1753 
   1754      There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
   1755      the data type of the exported variable:
   1756 
   1757      One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
   1758      the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
   1759      environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
   1760      supports this feature.
   1761 
   1762      A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
   1763      variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
   1764      For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
   1765      array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
   1766      variable.  Thus:
   1767 
   1768           extern type extern_array[];
   1769           extern_array[1] -->
   1770              { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
   1771 
   1772      or
   1773 
   1774           extern type extern_array[];
   1775           extern_array[1] -->
   1776              { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
   1777 
   1778      For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
   1779      is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
   1780      variable:
   1781 
   1782           extern struct s extern_struct;
   1783           extern_struct.field -->
   1784              { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
   1785 
   1786      or
   1787 
   1788           extern long long extern_ll;
   1789           extern_ll -->
   1790             { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
   1791 
   1792      A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
   1793      'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
   1794      `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
   1795      compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
   1796      building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
   1797      building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
   1798      between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
   1799      constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
   1800      usage:
   1801 
   1802      Original:
   1803           --foo.h
   1804           extern int arr[];
   1805           --foo.c
   1806           #include "foo.h"
   1807           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1808             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1809           }
   1810 
   1811      Solution 1:
   1812           --foo.h
   1813           extern int arr[];
   1814           --foo.c
   1815           #include "foo.h"
   1816           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1817             /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
   1818             volatile int *parr = arr;
   1819             printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
   1820           }
   1821 
   1822      Solution 2:
   1823           --foo.h
   1824           /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
   1825           #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
   1826             !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
   1827           #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
   1828           #else
   1829           #define FOO_IMPORT
   1830           #endif
   1831           extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
   1832           --foo.c
   1833           #include "foo.h"
   1834           void main(int argc, char **argv){
   1835             printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
   1836           }
   1837 
   1838      A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
   1839      use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
   1840      offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
   1841      functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
   1842      of the linker]
   1843 
   1844 `--disable-auto-import'
   1845      Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
   1846      `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
   1847      specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1848 
   1849 `--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1850      If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
   1851      section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
   1852      switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
   1853      can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
   1854      data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1855      targeted port of the linker]
   1856 
   1857 `--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
   1858      Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
   1859      from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
   1860      i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1861 
   1862 `--enable-extra-pe-debug'
   1863      Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
   1864      [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
   1865      linker]
   1866 
   1867 `--section-alignment'
   1868      Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
   1869      at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
   1870      0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
   1871      the linker]
   1872 
   1873 `--stack RESERVE'
   1874 `--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
   1875      Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
   1876      commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
   1877      reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
   1878      targeted port of the linker]
   1879 
   1880 `--subsystem WHICH'
   1881 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
   1882 `--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
   1883      Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
   1884      legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
   1885      `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
   1886      also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
   1887      is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
   1888 
   1889 
   1890 2.1.2 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
   1891 ------------------------------------------------------------
   1892 
   1893 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
   1894 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
   1895 
   1896 `--no-trampoline'
   1897      This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
   1898      trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
   1899      using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
   1900      function is taken).
   1901 
   1902 `--bank-window NAME'
   1903      This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
   1904      in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
   1905      window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
   1906      to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
   1907 
   1908 
   1909 2.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
   1910 ---------------------------------------------
   1911 
   1912 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
   1913 generation when linking for 68K targets.
   1914 
   1915 `--got=TYPE'
   1916      This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
   1917      TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
   1918      `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
   1919 
   1920 
   1921 
   1922 File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
   1923 
   1924 2.2 Environment Variables
   1925 =========================
   1926 
   1927 You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
   1928 `GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
   1929 
   1930    `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
   1931 `-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
   1932 names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
   1933 the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
   1934 `GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
   1935 format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
   1936 there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
   1937 that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
   1938 However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
   1939 conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
   1940 ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
   1941 
   1942    `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
   1943 `-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
   1944 behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
   1945 available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
   1946 option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
   1947 defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
   1948 configured.
   1949 
   1950    Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
   1951 `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
   1952 to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
   1953 similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
   1954 be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
   1955 
   1956 
   1957 File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
   1958 
   1959 3 Linker Scripts
   1960 ****************
   1961 
   1962 Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
   1963 in the linker command language.
   1964 
   1965    The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
   1966 sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
   1967 to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
   1968 do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
   1969 can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
   1970 commands described below.
   1971 
   1972    The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
   1973 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
   1974 linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
   1975 display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
   1976 as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
   1977 
   1978    You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
   1979 option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
   1980 linker script.
   1981 
   1982    You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
   1983 files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
   1984 Implicit Linker Scripts::.
   1985 
   1986 * Menu:
   1987 
   1988 * Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
   1989 * Script Format::		Linker Script Format
   1990 * Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
   1991 * Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
   1992 * Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
   1993 * SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
   1994 * MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
   1995 * PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
   1996 * VERSION::			VERSION Command
   1997 * Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
   1998 * Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
   1999 
   2000 
   2001 File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2002 
   2003 3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
   2004 ================================
   2005 
   2006 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
   2007 describe the linker script language.
   2008 
   2009    The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
   2010 output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
   2011 "object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
   2012 output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
   2013 will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
   2014 things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
   2015 input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
   2016 file is an "output section".
   2017 
   2018    Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
   2019 also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
   2020 A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
   2021 should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
   2022 with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
   2023 memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
   2024 there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
   2025 is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
   2026 debugging information.
   2027 
   2028    Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
   2029 first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
   2030 section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
   2031 "LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
   2032 section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
   2033 same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
   2034 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
   2035 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
   2036 based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
   2037 RAM address would be the VMA.
   2038 
   2039    You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
   2040 program with the `-h' option.
   2041 
   2042    Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
   2043 table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
   2044 and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
   2045 you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
   2046 defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
   2047 variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
   2048 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
   2049 
   2050    You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
   2051 or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
   2052 
   2053 
   2054 File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
   2055 
   2056 3.2 Linker Script Format
   2057 ========================
   2058 
   2059 Linker scripts are text files.
   2060 
   2061    You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
   2062 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
   2063 symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
   2064 generally ignored.
   2065 
   2066    Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
   2067 directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
   2068 would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
   2069 in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
   2070 file name.
   2071 
   2072    You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
   2073 `/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
   2074 whitespace.
   2075 
   2076 
   2077 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
   2078 
   2079 3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
   2080 ================================
   2081 
   2082 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
   2083 
   2084    The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
   2085 `SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
   2086 layout of the output file.
   2087 
   2088    The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
   2089 a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
   2090 initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
   2091 `.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
   2092 further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
   2093 files.
   2094 
   2095    For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
   2096 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
   2097 linker script which will do that:
   2098      SECTIONS
   2099      {
   2100        . = 0x10000;
   2101        .text : { *(.text) }
   2102        . = 0x8000000;
   2103        .data : { *(.data) }
   2104        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2105      }
   2106 
   2107    You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
   2108 by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
   2109 enclosed in curly braces.
   2110 
   2111    The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
   2112 sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
   2113 counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
   2114 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
   2115 current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
   2116 incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
   2117 `SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
   2118 
   2119    The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
   2120 required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
   2121 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
   2122 which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
   2123 which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
   2124 `.text' input sections in all input files.
   2125 
   2126    Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
   2127 `.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
   2128 section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
   2129 
   2130    The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
   2131 output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
   2132 address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
   2133 section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
   2134 size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
   2135 place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
   2136 section in memory.
   2137 
   2138    The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
   2139 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
   2140 example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
   2141 will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
   2142 have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
   2143 
   2144    That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
   2145 
   2146 
   2147 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
   2148 
   2149 3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
   2150 =================================
   2151 
   2152 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
   2153 
   2154 * Menu:
   2155 
   2156 * Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
   2157 * File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
   2158 
   2159 * Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
   2160 
   2161 * Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
   2162 
   2163 
   2164 File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2165 
   2166 3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
   2167 -----------------------------
   2168 
   2169 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
   2170 point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
   2171 point.  The argument is a symbol name:
   2172      ENTRY(SYMBOL)
   2173 
   2174    There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
   2175 the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
   2176 stopping when one of them succeeds:
   2177    * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
   2178 
   2179    * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
   2180 
   2181    * the value of the symbol `start', if defined;
   2182 
   2183    * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
   2184 
   2185    * The address `0'.
   2186 
   2187 
   2188 File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
   2189 
   2190 3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
   2191 ---------------------------------
   2192 
   2193 Several linker script commands deal with files.
   2194 
   2195 `INCLUDE FILENAME'
   2196      Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
   2197      be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
   2198      specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
   2199      up to 10 levels deep.
   2200 
   2201      You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
   2202      `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
   2203 
   2204 `INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2205 `INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
   2206      The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
   2207      in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
   2208 
   2209      For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
   2210      a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
   2211      line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
   2212 
   2213      In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
   2214      linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
   2215      option.
   2216 
   2217      In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
   2218      with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
   2219      inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
   2220      the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
   2221      file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
   2222      will search through the archive library search path.  See the
   2223      description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2224 
   2225      If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
   2226      `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
   2227 
   2228      When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
   2229      files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
   2230      script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
   2231 
   2232 `GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2233 `GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
   2234      The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
   2235      should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
   2236      new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
   2237      in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
   2238 
   2239 `AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
   2240 `AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
   2241      This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
   2242      commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
   2243      as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
   2244      with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
   2245      when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
   2246      `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
   2247      restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
   2248      afterwards.
   2249 
   2250 `OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
   2251      The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
   2252      `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
   2253      FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
   2254      Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
   2255      precedence.
   2256 
   2257      You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
   2258      output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
   2259 
   2260 `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
   2261      The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
   2262      looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
   2263      like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
   2264      Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
   2265      both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
   2266      searched first.
   2267 
   2268 `STARTUP(FILENAME)'
   2269      The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
   2270      that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
   2271      though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
   2272      useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
   2273      start of the first file.
   2274 
   2275 
   2276 File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2277 
   2278 3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
   2279 -----------------------------------------------
   2280 
   2281 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
   2282 
   2283 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
   2284 `OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
   2285      The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
   2286      output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
   2287      exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2288      Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
   2289      line option takes precedence.
   2290 
   2291      You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
   2292      formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
   2293      permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
   2294      desired endianness.
   2295 
   2296      If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
   2297      be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
   2298      format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
   2299      output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
   2300 
   2301      For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
   2302      uses this command:
   2303           OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
   2304      This says that the default format for the output file is
   2305      `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
   2306      option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
   2307      format.
   2308 
   2309 `TARGET(BFDNAME)'
   2310      The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
   2311      files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
   2312      command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
   2313      Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
   2314      but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
   2315      used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
   2316 
   2317 
   2318 File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
   2319 
   2320 3.4.4 Other Linker Script Commands
   2321 ----------------------------------
   2322 
   2323 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
   2324 
   2325 `ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
   2326      Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
   2327      with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
   2328 
   2329 `EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
   2330      Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
   2331      symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
   2332      modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
   2333      each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
   2334      command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
   2335 
   2336 `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2337      This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
   2338      to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
   2339      output file is specified (`-r').
   2340 
   2341 `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
   2342      This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
   2343      command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
   2344      to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
   2345 
   2346 `INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
   2347      This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
   2348      augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
   2349      inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
   2350      OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
   2351      linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
   2352      sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
   2353      the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
   2354      the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
   2355      linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
   2356      default linker script statements in the internal linker
   2357      representation of the script.  In particular, input section
   2358      assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
   2359      the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
   2360      `INSERT' might look:
   2361 
   2362           SECTIONS
   2363           {
   2364             OVERLAY :
   2365             {
   2366               .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
   2367               .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
   2368             }
   2369           }
   2370           INSERT AFTER .text;
   2371 
   2372 `NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
   2373      This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
   2374      references among certain output sections.
   2375 
   2376      In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
   2377      using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
   2378      section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
   2379      sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
   2380      code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
   2381 
   2382      The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
   2383      `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
   2384      an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
   2385      `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
   2386      names.
   2387 
   2388 `OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
   2389      Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
   2390      one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
   2391      see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
   2392      program with the `-f' option.
   2393 
   2394 
   2395 File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
   2396 
   2397 3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
   2398 ===============================
   2399 
   2400 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
   2401 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
   2402 
   2403 * Menu:
   2404 
   2405 * Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
   2406 * PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
   2407 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2408 * Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
   2409 
   2410 
   2411 File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2412 
   2413 3.5.1 Simple Assignments
   2414 ------------------------
   2415 
   2416 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
   2417 
   2418 `SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
   2419 `SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
   2420 `SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
   2421 `SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
   2422 `SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
   2423 `SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
   2424 `SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
   2425 `SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
   2426 `SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
   2427 
   2428    The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
   2429 the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
   2430 adjusted accordingly.
   2431 
   2432    The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
   2433 only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
   2434 
   2435    The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
   2436 
   2437    Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
   2438 
   2439    You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
   2440 as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
   2441 section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
   2442 
   2443    The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
   2444 expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
   2445 
   2446    Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
   2447 assignments may be used:
   2448 
   2449      floating_point = 0;
   2450      SECTIONS
   2451      {
   2452        .text :
   2453          {
   2454            *(.text)
   2455            _etext = .;
   2456          }
   2457        _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
   2458        .data : { *(.data) }
   2459      }
   2460    In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
   2461 zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
   2462 last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
   2463 address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
   2464 boundary.
   2465 
   2466 
   2467 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
   2468 
   2469 3.5.2 PROVIDE
   2470 -------------
   2471 
   2472 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
   2473 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
   2474 the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
   2475 However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
   2476 function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
   2477 be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
   2478 but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
   2479 
   2480    Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
   2481      SECTIONS
   2482      {
   2483        .text :
   2484          {
   2485            *(.text)
   2486            _etext = .;
   2487            PROVIDE(etext = .);
   2488          }
   2489      }
   2490 
   2491    In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
   2492 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
   2493 the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
   2494 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
   2495 If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
   2496 will use the definition in the linker script.
   2497 
   2498 
   2499 File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
   2500 
   2501 3.5.3 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
   2502 --------------------
   2503 
   2504 Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
   2505 hidden and won't be exported.
   2506 
   2507 
   2508 File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
   2509 
   2510 3.5.4 Source Code Reference
   2511 ---------------------------
   2512 
   2513 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
   2514 intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
   2515 variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
   2516 that does not have a value.
   2517 
   2518    Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
   2519 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
   2520 stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
   2521 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
   2522 mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
   2523 a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
   2524 variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
   2525 linker script variable might be referred to as:
   2526 
   2527        extern int foo;
   2528 
   2529    But in the linker script it might be defined as:
   2530 
   2531        _foo = 1000;
   2532 
   2533    In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
   2534 transformation has taken place.
   2535 
   2536    When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
   2537 things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
   2538 the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
   2539 that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
   2540 holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
   2541 of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
   2542 following C declaration, at file scope:
   2543 
   2544        int foo = 1000;
   2545 
   2546    creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
   2547 the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
   2548 initially stored.
   2549 
   2550    When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
   2551 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
   2552 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
   2553 So:
   2554 
   2555        foo = 1;
   2556 
   2557    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
   2558 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
   2559 address.  Whereas:
   2560 
   2561        int * a = & foo;
   2562 
   2563    looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
   2564 then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
   2565 variable `a'.
   2566 
   2567    Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
   2568 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
   2569 an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
   2570 definition:
   2571 
   2572        foo = 1000;
   2573 
   2574    creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
   2575 address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
   2576 address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
   2577 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
   2578 access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
   2579 
   2580    Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
   2581 code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
   2582 attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
   2583 contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
   2584 .FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
   2585 
   2586        start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
   2587        end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
   2588        start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
   2589 
   2590    Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
   2591 
   2592        extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
   2593 
   2594        memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
   2595 
   2596    Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
   2597 
   2598 
   2599 File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
   2600 
   2601 3.6 SECTIONS Command
   2602 ====================
   2603 
   2604 The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
   2605 output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
   2606 
   2607    The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
   2608      SECTIONS
   2609      {
   2610        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2611        SECTIONS-COMMAND
   2612        ...
   2613      }
   2614 
   2615    Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
   2616 
   2617    * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
   2618 
   2619    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2620 
   2621    * an output section description
   2622 
   2623    * an overlay description
   2624 
   2625    The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
   2626 `SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
   2627 those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
   2628 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
   2629 the layout of the output file.
   2630 
   2631    Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
   2632 below.
   2633 
   2634    If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
   2635 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
   2636 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
   2637 input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
   2638 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
   2639 in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
   2640 
   2641 * Menu:
   2642 
   2643 * Output Section Description::	Output section description
   2644 * Output Section Name::		Output section name
   2645 * Output Section Address::	Output section address
   2646 * Input Section::		Input section description
   2647 * Output Section Data::		Output section data
   2648 * Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
   2649 * Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
   2650 * Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
   2651 * Overlay Description::		Overlay description
   2652 
   2653 
   2654 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2655 
   2656 3.6.1 Output Section Description
   2657 --------------------------------
   2658 
   2659 The full description of an output section looks like this:
   2660      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   2661        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   2662        {
   2663          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2664          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   2665          ...
   2666        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   2667 
   2668    Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
   2669 attributes.
   2670 
   2671    The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
   2672 is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
   2673 line breaks and other white space are optional.
   2674 
   2675    Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
   2676 
   2677    * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
   2678 
   2679    * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
   2680 
   2681    * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
   2682 
   2683    * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
   2684 
   2685 
   2686 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
   2687 
   2688 3.6.2 Output Section Name
   2689 -------------------------
   2690 
   2691 The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
   2692 constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
   2693 limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
   2694 the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
   2695 `.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
   2696 of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
   2697 the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
   2698 may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
   2699 any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
   2700 
   2701    The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
   2702 Discarding::.
   2703 
   2704 
   2705 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
   2706 
   2707 3.6.3 Output Section Address
   2708 ----------------------------
   2709 
   2710 The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
   2711 of the output section.  If you do not provide ADDRESS, the linker will
   2712 set it based on REGION if present, or otherwise based on the current
   2713 value of the location counter.
   2714 
   2715    If you provide ADDRESS, the address of the output section will be
   2716 set to precisely that.  If you provide neither ADDRESS nor REGION, then
   2717 the address of the output section will be set to the current value of
   2718 the location counter aligned to the alignment requirements of the
   2719 output section.  The alignment requirement of the output section is the
   2720 strictest alignment of any input section contained within the output
   2721 section.
   2722 
   2723    For example,
   2724      .text . : { *(.text) }
   2725    and
   2726      .text : { *(.text) }
   2727    are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
   2728 output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
   2729 second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
   2730 to the strictest alignment of a `.text' input section.
   2731 
   2732    The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
   2733 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
   2734 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
   2735 do something like this:
   2736      .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
   2737    This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
   2738 aligned upward to the specified value.
   2739 
   2740    Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
   2741 location counter.
   2742 
   2743 
   2744 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
   2745 
   2746 3.6.4 Input Section Description
   2747 -------------------------------
   2748 
   2749 The most common output section command is an input section description.
   2750 
   2751    The input section description is the most basic linker script
   2752 operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
   2753 your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
   2754 linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
   2755 
   2756 * Menu:
   2757 
   2758 * Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
   2759 * Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
   2760 * Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
   2761 * Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
   2762 * Input Section Example::	Input section example
   2763 
   2764 
   2765 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2766 
   2767 3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
   2768 ............................
   2769 
   2770 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
   2771 by a list of section names in parentheses.
   2772 
   2773    The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
   2774 describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
   2775 
   2776    The most common input section description is to include all input
   2777 sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
   2778 include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
   2779      *(.text)
   2780    Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
   2781 a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
   2782 be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
   2783 EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
   2784      *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
   2785    will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
   2786 `otherfile.o' to be included.
   2787 
   2788    There are two ways to include more than one section:
   2789      *(.text .rdata)
   2790      *(.text) *(.rdata)
   2791    The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
   2792 `.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
   2793 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
   2794 they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
   2795 input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
   2796 sections.
   2797 
   2798    You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
   2799 file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
   2800 data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
   2801      data.o(.data)
   2802 
   2803    You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
   2804 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
   2805 no whitespace around the colon.
   2806 
   2807 `archive:file'
   2808      matches file within archive
   2809 
   2810 `archive:'
   2811      matches the whole archive
   2812 
   2813 `:file'
   2814      matches file but not one in an archive
   2815 
   2816    Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
   2817 wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
   2818 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
   2819 is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
   2820 `c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
   2821 `EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
   2822 contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
   2823 using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
   2824 
   2825    If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
   2826 in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
   2827 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
   2828      data.o
   2829 
   2830    When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
   2831 and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
   2832 see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
   2833 in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
   2834 the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
   2835 Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
   2836 not search for the file in the archive search path.
   2837 
   2838 
   2839 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
   2840 
   2841 3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
   2842 .......................................
   2843 
   2844 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
   2845 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
   2846 
   2847    The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
   2848 pattern for the file name.
   2849 
   2850    The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
   2851 
   2852 `*'
   2853      matches any number of characters
   2854 
   2855 `?'
   2856      matches any single character
   2857 
   2858 `[CHARS]'
   2859      matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
   2860      may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
   2861      match any lower case letter
   2862 
   2863 `\'
   2864      quotes the following character
   2865 
   2866    When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
   2867 will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
   2868 Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
   2869 it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
   2870 In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
   2871 
   2872    File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
   2873 specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
   2874 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
   2875 
   2876    If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
   2877 name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
   2878 linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
   2879 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
   2880 `data.o' rule will not be used:
   2881      .data : { *(.data) }
   2882      .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
   2883 
   2884    Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
   2885 wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
   2886 change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
   2887 wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
   2888 the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
   2889 sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
   2890 file.
   2891 
   2892    `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
   2893 difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
   2894 order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
   2895 
   2896    `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
   2897 
   2898    When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
   2899 there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
   2900 
   2901   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2902      It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
   2903      if 2 sections have the same name.
   2904 
   2905   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2906      It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
   2907      if 2 sections have the same alignment.
   2908 
   2909   3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
   2910      treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
   2911 
   2912   4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
   2913      pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
   2914      section pattern).
   2915 
   2916   5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
   2917 
   2918    When both command line section sorting option and linker script
   2919 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
   2920 precedence over the command line option.
   2921 
   2922    If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
   2923 command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
   2924 as nested sorting command.
   2925 
   2926   1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
   2927      alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2928      (wildcard section pattern)).
   2929 
   2930   2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
   2931      `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
   2932      (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
   2933 
   2934    If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
   2935 command line option will be ignored.
   2936 
   2937    If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
   2938 the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
   2939 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
   2940 
   2941    This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
   2942 files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
   2943 sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
   2944 place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
   2945 character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
   2946 `.data' section in `.data'.
   2947      SECTIONS {
   2948        .text : { *(.text) }
   2949        .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
   2950        .data : { *(.data) }
   2951        .bss : { *(.bss) }
   2952      }
   2953 
   2954 
   2955 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
   2956 
   2957 3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
   2958 ........................................
   2959 
   2960 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
   2961 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
   2962 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
   2963 named `COMMON'.
   2964 
   2965    You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
   2966 other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
   2967 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
   2968 input files are placed in another section.
   2969 
   2970    In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
   2971 `.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
   2972      .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
   2973 
   2974    Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
   2975 For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
   2976 common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
   2977 use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
   2978 In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
   2979 symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
   2980 map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
   2981 locations.
   2982 
   2983    You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
   2984 notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
   2985 
   2986 
   2987 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
   2988 
   2989 3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
   2990 ............................................
   2991 
   2992 When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
   2993 often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
   2994 accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
   2995 `KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
   2996 
   2997 
   2998 File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
   2999 
   3000 3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
   3001 .............................
   3002 
   3003 The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
   3004 to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
   3005 start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
   3006 All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
   3007 same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
   3008 output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
   3009 All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
   3010 are written to output section `outputc'.
   3011 
   3012      SECTIONS {
   3013        outputa 0x10000 :
   3014          {
   3015          all.o
   3016          foo.o (.input1)
   3017          }
   3018        outputb :
   3019          {
   3020          foo.o (.input2)
   3021          foo1.o (.input1)
   3022          }
   3023        outputc :
   3024          {
   3025          *(.input1)
   3026          *(.input2)
   3027          }
   3028      }
   3029 
   3030 
   3031 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
   3032 
   3033 3.6.5 Output Section Data
   3034 -------------------------
   3035 
   3036 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
   3037 `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
   3038 command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
   3039 providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
   3040 expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
   3041 
   3042    The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
   3043 four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
   3044 location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
   3045 
   3046    For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
   3047 value of the symbol `addr':
   3048      BYTE(1)
   3049      LONG(addr)
   3050 
   3051    When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
   3052 they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
   3053 are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
   3054 stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
   3055 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
   3056 
   3057    If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
   3058 endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
   3059 endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
   3060 endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
   3061 stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
   3062 
   3063    Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
   3064 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
   3065      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
   3066    whereas this will work:
   3067      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
   3068 
   3069    You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
   3070 current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
   3071 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
   3072 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
   3073 with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
   3074 statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
   3075 the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
   3076 you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
   3077 section.
   3078 
   3079    This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
   3080 value `0x90':
   3081      FILL(0x90909090)
   3082 
   3083    The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
   3084 attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
   3085 `FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
   3086 `FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
   3087 details on the fill expression.
   3088 
   3089 
   3090 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
   3091 
   3092 3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
   3093 -----------------------------
   3094 
   3095 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
   3096 commands.
   3097 
   3098 `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
   3099      The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
   3100      file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
   3101      corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
   3102      output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
   3103      appears.
   3104 
   3105      This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
   3106      normally used for any other object file format.
   3107 
   3108 `CONSTRUCTORS'
   3109      When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
   3110      unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
   3111      destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
   3112      arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
   3113      automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
   3114      name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
   3115      tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
   3116      section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
   3117      `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
   3118 
   3119      The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
   3120      constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
   3121      Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
   3122      end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
   3123      number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
   3124      destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
   3125      actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
   3126      normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
   3127      `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
   3128      `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
   3129      `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
   3130 
   3131      For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
   3132      arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
   3133      addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
   3134      and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
   3135      linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
   3136      runtime code expects to see.
   3137 
   3138                 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3139                 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3140                 *(.ctors)
   3141                 LONG(0)
   3142                 __CTOR_END__ = .;
   3143                 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
   3144                 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
   3145                 *(.dtors)
   3146                 LONG(0)
   3147                 __DTOR_END__ = .;
   3148 
   3149      If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
   3150      which provides some control over the order in which global
   3151      constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
   3152      to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
   3153      the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
   3154      instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
   3155      `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
   3156      just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
   3157 
   3158      Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
   3159      automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
   3160      them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
   3161      and writing your own linker scripts.
   3162 
   3163 
   3164 
   3165 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
   3166 
   3167 3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
   3168 -------------------------------
   3169 
   3170 The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
   3171 for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
   3172 present in any of the input files.  For example:
   3173      .foo : { *(.foo) }
   3174    will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
   3175 `.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
   3176 are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
   3177 an output section will also create the output section.
   3178 
   3179    The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
   3180 Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
   3181 defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
   3182 obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
   3183 section is discarded.
   3184 
   3185    The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
   3186 input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
   3187 section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
   3188 
   3189 
   3190 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
   3191 
   3192 3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
   3193 -------------------------------
   3194 
   3195 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
   3196 like this:
   3197      SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
   3198        [AT(LMA)] [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)] [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
   3199        {
   3200          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3201          OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3202          ...
   3203        } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
   3204 We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
   3205 OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
   3206 section attributes.
   3207 
   3208 * Menu:
   3209 
   3210 * Output Section Type::		Output section type
   3211 * Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
   3212 * Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
   3213 * Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
   3214 * Output Section Region::	Output section region
   3215 * Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
   3216 * Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
   3217 
   3218 
   3219 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3220 
   3221 3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
   3222 ...........................
   3223 
   3224 Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
   3225 parentheses.  The following types are defined:
   3226 
   3227 `NOLOAD'
   3228      The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
   3229      be loaded into memory when the program is run.
   3230 
   3231 `DSECT'
   3232 `COPY'
   3233 `INFO'
   3234 `OVERLAY'
   3235      These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
   3236      rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
   3237      marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
   3238      section when the program is run.
   3239 
   3240    The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
   3241 the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
   3242 the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
   3243 section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
   3244 loaded when the program is run.  The contents of the `ROM' section will
   3245 appear in the linker output file as usual.
   3246      SECTIONS {
   3247        ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
   3248        ...
   3249      }
   3250 
   3251 
   3252 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3253 
   3254 3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
   3255 ..........................
   3256 
   3257 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
   3258 *Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The address expression which may appear
   3259 in an output section description sets the VMA (*note Output Section
   3260 Address::).
   3261 
   3262    The expression LMA that follows the `AT' keyword specifies the load
   3263 address of the section.
   3264 
   3265    Alternatively, with `AT>LMA_REGION' expression, you may specify a
   3266 memory region for the section's load address. *Note MEMORY::.  Note
   3267 that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the linker
   3268 will use the LMA_REGION as the VMA region as well.
   3269 
   3270    If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
   3271 the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between VMA and
   3272 LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output section in the
   3273 same region.  If there is no preceding output section or the section is
   3274 not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal to the VMA.  *Note
   3275 Output Section Region::.
   3276 
   3277    This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
   3278 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
   3279 called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
   3280 loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
   3281 `0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
   3282 `0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
   3283 shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
   3284 
   3285      SECTIONS
   3286        {
   3287        .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
   3288        .mdata 0x2000 :
   3289          AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
   3290          { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
   3291        .bss 0x3000 :
   3292          { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
   3293      }
   3294 
   3295    The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
   3296 with this linker script would include something like the following, to
   3297 copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
   3298 Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
   3299 linker script.
   3300 
   3301      extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
   3302      char *src = &_etext;
   3303      char *dst = &_data;
   3304 
   3305      /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
   3306      while (dst < &_edata) {
   3307        *dst++ = *src++;
   3308      }
   3309 
   3310      /* Zero bss */
   3311      for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
   3312        *dst = 0;
   3313 
   3314 
   3315 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3316 
   3317 3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
   3318 ...............................
   3319 
   3320 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
   3321 
   3322 
   3323 File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3324 
   3325 3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
   3326 ..............................
   3327 
   3328 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
   3329 SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
   3330 sections, whether larger or smaller.
   3331 
   3332 
   3333 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3334 
   3335 3.6.8.5 Output Section Region
   3336 .............................
   3337 
   3338 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
   3339 using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
   3340 
   3341    Here is a simple example:
   3342      MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
   3343      SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
   3344 
   3345 
   3346 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3347 
   3348 3.6.8.6 Output Section Phdr
   3349 ...........................
   3350 
   3351 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
   3352 using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
   3353 segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
   3354 those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
   3355 You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
   3356 segment at all.
   3357 
   3358    Here is a simple example:
   3359      PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
   3360      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
   3361 
   3362 
   3363 File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
   3364 
   3365 3.6.8.7 Output Section Fill
   3366 ...........................
   3367 
   3368 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
   3369 FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
   3370 unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
   3371 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
   3372 filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
   3373 is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
   3374 and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
   3375 hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
   3376 become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
   3377 parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
   3378 significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
   3379 number is big-endian.
   3380 
   3381    You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
   3382 output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
   3383 
   3384    Here is a simple example:
   3385      SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
   3386 
   3387 
   3388 File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
   3389 
   3390 3.6.9 Overlay Description
   3391 -------------------------
   3392 
   3393 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
   3394 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
   3395 the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
   3396 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
   3397 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
   3398 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
   3399 than another.
   3400 
   3401    Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
   3402 command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
   3403 description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
   3404      OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
   3405        {
   3406          SECNAME1
   3407            {
   3408              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3409              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3410              ...
   3411            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3412          SECNAME2
   3413            {
   3414              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3415              OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
   3416              ...
   3417            } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3418          ...
   3419        } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
   3420 
   3421    Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
   3422 section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
   3423 definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
   3424 within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
   3425 no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
   3426 an `OVERLAY'.
   3427 
   3428    The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
   3429 load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
   3430 consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
   3431 `OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
   3432 address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
   3433 address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
   3434 location counter).
   3435 
   3436    If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
   3437 the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
   3438 run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
   3439 section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
   3440 Commands.
   3441 
   3442    For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
   3443 provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
   3444 the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
   3445 `__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
   3446 section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
   3447 identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
   3448 to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
   3449 
   3450    At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
   3451 to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
   3452 section.
   3453 
   3454    Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
   3455 `SECTIONS' construct.
   3456        OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
   3457         {
   3458           .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3459           .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3460         }
   3461 This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
   3462 0x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
   3463 be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
   3464 defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
   3465 `__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
   3466 
   3467    C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
   3468 like the following.
   3469 
   3470        extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
   3471        memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
   3472                &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
   3473 
   3474    Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
   3475 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
   3476 example could have been written identically as follows.
   3477 
   3478        .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
   3479        PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
   3480        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
   3481        .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
   3482        PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
   3483        PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
   3484        . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
   3485 
   3486 
   3487 File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
   3488 
   3489 3.7 MEMORY Command
   3490 ==================
   3491 
   3492 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
   3493 memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
   3494 
   3495    The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
   3496 memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
   3497 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
   3498 can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
   3499 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
   3500 regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
   3501 around to fit into the available regions.
   3502 
   3503    A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
   3504 However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
   3505 wish.  The syntax is:
   3506      MEMORY
   3507        {
   3508          NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
   3509          ...
   3510        }
   3511 
   3512    The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
   3513 The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
   3514 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3515 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
   3516 have a distinct name.
   3517 
   3518    The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
   3519 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
   3520 not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
   3521 SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
   3522 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
   3523 the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
   3524 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
   3525 
   3526    The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
   3527 `R'
   3528      Read-only section
   3529 
   3530 `W'
   3531      Read/write section
   3532 
   3533 `X'
   3534      Executable section
   3535 
   3536 `A'
   3537      Allocatable section
   3538 
   3539 `I'
   3540      Initialized section
   3541 
   3542 `L'
   3543      Same as `I'
   3544 
   3545 `!'
   3546      Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
   3547 
   3548    If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
   3549 `!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
   3550 reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
   3551 memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
   3552 
   3553    The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
   3554 memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
   3555 cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
   3556 `org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
   3557 
   3558    The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
   3559 As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
   3560 and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
   3561 abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
   3562 
   3563    In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
   3564 regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
   3565 and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
   3566 will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
   3567 explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
   3568 executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
   3569 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
   3570 
   3571      MEMORY
   3572        {
   3573          rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
   3574          ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
   3575        }
   3576 
   3577    Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
   3578 specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
   3579 output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
   3580 named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
   3581 *Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
   3582 output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
   3583 address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
   3584 directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
   3585 will issue an error message.
   3586 
   3587    It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
   3588 expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
   3589 
   3590        _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
   3591 
   3592 
   3593 File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
   3594 
   3595 3.8 PHDRS Command
   3596 =================
   3597 
   3598 The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
   3599 "segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
   3600 loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
   3601 program with the `-p' option.
   3602 
   3603    When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
   3604 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
   3605 program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
   3606 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
   3607 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
   3608 
   3609    The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
   3610 However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
   3611 precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
   3612 linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
   3613 create any program headers other than the ones specified.
   3614 
   3615    The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
   3616 generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
   3617 ignore `PHDRS'.
   3618 
   3619    This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
   3620 `FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
   3621 
   3622      PHDRS
   3623      {
   3624        NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
   3625              [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
   3626      }
   3627 
   3628    The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
   3629 linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
   3630 names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
   3631 symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
   3632 have a distinct name.
   3633 
   3634    Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
   3635 system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
   3636 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
   3637 sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
   3638 to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
   3639 Phdr::.
   3640 
   3641    It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
   3642 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
   3643 repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
   3644 section.
   3645 
   3646    If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
   3647 the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
   3648 specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
   3649 generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
   3650 segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
   3651 the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
   3652 
   3653    You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords appear after the
   3654 program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
   3655 The `FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
   3656 file header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include
   3657 the ELF program headers themselves.
   3658 
   3659    The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
   3660 value of the keyword.
   3661 
   3662 `PT_NULL' (0)
   3663      Indicates an unused program header.
   3664 
   3665 `PT_LOAD' (1)
   3666      Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
   3667      loaded from the file.
   3668 
   3669 `PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
   3670      Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
   3671 
   3672 `PT_INTERP' (3)
   3673      Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
   3674      be found.
   3675 
   3676 `PT_NOTE' (4)
   3677      Indicates a segment holding note information.
   3678 
   3679 `PT_SHLIB' (5)
   3680      A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
   3681      ELF ABI.
   3682 
   3683 `PT_PHDR' (6)
   3684      Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
   3685 
   3686 EXPRESSION
   3687      An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
   3688      may be used for types not defined above.
   3689 
   3690    You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
   3691 address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
   3692 `AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
   3693 LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
   3694 section attribute.
   3695 
   3696    The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
   3697 which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
   3698 explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
   3699 integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
   3700 
   3701    Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
   3702 headers used on a native ELF system.
   3703 
   3704      PHDRS
   3705      {
   3706        headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
   3707        interp PT_INTERP ;
   3708        text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
   3709        data PT_LOAD ;
   3710        dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
   3711      }
   3712 
   3713      SECTIONS
   3714      {
   3715        . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
   3716        .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
   3717        .text : { *(.text) } :text
   3718        .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
   3719        ...
   3720        . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
   3721        .data : { *(.data) } :data
   3722        .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
   3723        ...
   3724      }
   3725 
   3726 
   3727 File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
   3728 
   3729 3.9 VERSION Command
   3730 ===================
   3731 
   3732 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
   3733 only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
   3734 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
   3735 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
   3736 shared library.
   3737 
   3738    You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
   3739 or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
   3740 can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
   3741 
   3742    The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
   3743      VERSION { version-script-commands }
   3744 
   3745    The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
   3746 by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
   3747 version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
   3748 version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
   3749 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
   3750 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
   3751 library.
   3752 
   3753    The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
   3754 few examples.
   3755 
   3756      VERS_1.1 {
   3757      	 global:
   3758      		 foo1;
   3759      	 local:
   3760      		 old*;
   3761      		 original*;
   3762      		 new*;
   3763      };
   3764 
   3765      VERS_1.2 {
   3766      		 foo2;
   3767      } VERS_1.1;
   3768 
   3769      VERS_2.0 {
   3770      		 bar1; bar2;
   3771      	 extern "C++" {
   3772      		 ns::*;
   3773      		 "int f(int, double)";
   3774               }
   3775      } VERS_1.2;
   3776 
   3777    This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
   3778 version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
   3779 script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
   3780 symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
   3781 shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
   3782 symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
   3783 The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
   3784 when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
   3785 specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
   3786 as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
   3787 
   3788    Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
   3789 upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
   3790 node `VERS_1.2'.
   3791 
   3792    Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
   3793 depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
   3794 `bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
   3795 
   3796    When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
   3797 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
   3798 unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
   3799 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
   3800 somewhere in the version script.
   3801 
   3802    The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
   3803 what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
   3804 could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
   3805 this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
   3806 
   3807    Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
   3808 the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
   3809 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
   3810 which won't.
   3811 
   3812      { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
   3813 
   3814    When you link an application against a shared library that has
   3815 versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
   3816 symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
   3817 each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
   3818 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
   3819 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
   3820 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
   3821 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
   3822 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
   3823 search for each symbol reference.
   3824 
   3825    The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
   3826 doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
   3827 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
   3828 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
   3829 the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
   3830 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
   3831 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
   3832 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
   3833 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
   3834 
   3835    There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
   3836 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
   3837 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
   3838 script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
   3839 maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
   3840      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3841    in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
   3842 be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
   3843 `local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
   3844 from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
   3845 version script.
   3846 
   3847    The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
   3848 function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
   3849 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
   3850 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
   3851 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
   3852 
   3853    To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
   3854 file.  Here is an example:
   3855 
   3856      __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
   3857      __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo (a] VERS_1.1");
   3858      __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo (a] VERS_1.2");
   3859      __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
   3860 
   3861    In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
   3862 unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
   3863 this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
   3864 `old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
   3865 
   3866    When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
   3867 be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
   3868 this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
   3869 type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
   3870 symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
   3871 have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
   3872 
   3873    If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
   3874 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
   3875 (i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
   3876 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
   3877 
   3878    You can also specify the language in the version script:
   3879 
   3880      VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
   3881 
   3882    The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
   3883 iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
   3884 according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
   3885 `version-script-commands'.
   3886 
   3887    Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
   3888 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
   3889 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
   3890 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
   3891 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
   3892 cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
   3893 change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
   3894 check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
   3895 when you upgrade.
   3896 
   3897 
   3898 File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
   3899 
   3900 3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
   3901 ==================================
   3902 
   3903 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
   3904 that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
   3905 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
   3906 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
   3907 
   3908    You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
   3909 
   3910    The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
   3911 in expressions.
   3912 
   3913 * Menu:
   3914 
   3915 * Constants::			Constants
   3916 * Symbols::			Symbol Names
   3917 * Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
   3918 * Location Counter::		The Location Counter
   3919 * Operators::			Operators
   3920 * Evaluation::			Evaluation
   3921 * Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
   3922 * Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
   3923 
   3924 
   3925 File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3926 
   3927 3.10.1 Constants
   3928 ----------------
   3929 
   3930 All constants are integers.
   3931 
   3932    As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
   3933 octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
   3934 The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
   3935 
   3936    In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
   3937 constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively. For example, the
   3938 following all refer to the same quantity:
   3939      _fourk_1 = 4K;
   3940      _fourk_2 = 4096;
   3941      _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
   3942 
   3943 
   3944 File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
   3945 
   3946 3.10.2 Symbol Names
   3947 -------------------
   3948 
   3949 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
   3950 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
   3951 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
   3952 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
   3953 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
   3954      "SECTION" = 9;
   3955      "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
   3956 
   3957    Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
   3958 safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
   3959 symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
   3960 
   3961 
   3962 File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
   3963 
   3964 3.10.3 Orphan Sections
   3965 ----------------------
   3966 
   3967 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
   3968 explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
   3969 linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
   3970 to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
   3971 heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
   3972 non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
   3973 loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
   3974 then it places at the end of the file.
   3975 
   3976    For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
   3977 as well as section flag.
   3978 
   3979    If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
   3980 the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
   3981 __start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
   3982 section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
   3983 orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
   3984 representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
   3985 
   3986 
   3987 File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
   3988 
   3989 3.10.4 The Location Counter
   3990 ---------------------------
   3991 
   3992 The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
   3993 output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
   3994 an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
   3995 `SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
   3996 ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
   3997 
   3998    Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
   3999 moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
   4000 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
   4001 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
   4002 creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
   4003 
   4004      SECTIONS
   4005      {
   4006        output :
   4007          {
   4008            file1(.text)
   4009            . = . + 1000;
   4010            file2(.text)
   4011            . += 1000;
   4012            file3(.text)
   4013          } = 0x12345678;
   4014      }
   4015    In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
   4016 at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
   4017 1000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
   4018 with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
   4019 The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
   4020 (*note Output Section Fill::).
   4021 
   4022    Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
   4023 current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
   4024 whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
   4025 If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
   4026 byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
   4027 Thus in a script like this:
   4028 
   4029      SECTIONS
   4030      {
   4031          . = 0x100
   4032          .text: {
   4033            *(.text)
   4034            . = 0x200
   4035          }
   4036          . = 0x500
   4037          .data: {
   4038            *(.data)
   4039            . += 0x600
   4040          }
   4041      }
   4042 
   4043    The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
   4044 a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
   4045 `.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
   4046 an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
   4047 backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
   4048 an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
   4049 the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
   4050 section itself.
   4051 
   4052    Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
   4053 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
   4054 needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
   4055 
   4056      SECTIONS
   4057      {
   4058          start_of_text = . ;
   4059          .text: { *(.text) }
   4060          end_of_text = . ;
   4061 
   4062          start_of_data = . ;
   4063          .data: { *(.data) }
   4064          end_of_data = . ;
   4065      }
   4066 
   4067    If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
   4068 mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
   4069 `.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
   4070 on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
   4071 particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
   4072 associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
   4073 assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
   4074 output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
   4075 I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
   4076 script was written as follows:
   4077 
   4078      SECTIONS
   4079      {
   4080          start_of_text = . ;
   4081          .text: { *(.text) }
   4082          end_of_text = . ;
   4083 
   4084          start_of_data = . ;
   4085          .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
   4086          .data: { *(.data) }
   4087          end_of_data = . ;
   4088      }
   4089 
   4090    This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
   4091 `start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
   4092 to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
   4093 assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
   4094 section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
   4095 write:
   4096 
   4097      SECTIONS
   4098      {
   4099          start_of_text = . ;
   4100          .text: { *(.text) }
   4101          end_of_text = . ;
   4102 
   4103          . = . ;
   4104          start_of_data = . ;
   4105          .data: { *(.data) }
   4106          end_of_data = . ;
   4107      }
   4108 
   4109    Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
   4110 `end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
   4111 
   4112 
   4113 File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
   4114 
   4115 3.10.5 Operators
   4116 ----------------
   4117 
   4118 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
   4119 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
   4120      precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
   4121      (highest)
   4122      1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
   4123      2               left            *  /  %
   4124      3               left            +  -
   4125      4               left            >>  <<
   4126      5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
   4127      6               left            &
   4128      7               left            |
   4129      8               left            &&
   4130      9               left            ||
   4131      10              right           ? :
   4132      11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
   4133      (lowest)
   4134    Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
   4135 
   4136 
   4137 File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
   4138 
   4139 3.10.6 Evaluation
   4140 -----------------
   4141 
   4142 The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
   4143 an expression when absolutely necessary.
   4144 
   4145    The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
   4146 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
   4147 regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
   4148 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
   4149 
   4150    However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
   4151 until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
   4152 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
   4153 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
   4154 
   4155    The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
   4156 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
   4157 allocation.
   4158 
   4159    Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
   4160 `.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
   4161 
   4162    If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
   4163 available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
   4164 following
   4165      SECTIONS
   4166        {
   4167          .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
   4168            { *(.text) }
   4169        }
   4170 will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
   4171 address'.
   4172 
   4173 
   4174 File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
   4175 
   4176 3.10.7 The Section of an Expression
   4177 -----------------------------------
   4178 
   4179 When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
   4180 or relative to some section.  A relative expression is expressed as a
   4181 fixed offset from the base of a section.
   4182 
   4183    The position of the expression within the linker script determines
   4184 whether it is absolute or relative.  An expression which appears within
   4185 an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
   4186 section.  An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
   4187 
   4188    A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you
   4189 request relocatable output using the `-r' option.  That means that a
   4190 further link operation may change the value of the symbol.  The symbol's
   4191 section will be the section of the relative expression.
   4192 
   4193    A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
   4194 through any further link operation.  The symbol will be absolute, and
   4195 will not have any particular associated section.
   4196 
   4197    You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
   4198 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
   4199 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
   4200 section `.data':
   4201      SECTIONS
   4202        {
   4203          .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
   4204        }
   4205    If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
   4206 `.data' section.
   4207 
   4208 
   4209 File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
   4210 
   4211 3.10.8 Builtin Functions
   4212 ------------------------
   4213 
   4214 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
   4215 use in linker script expressions.
   4216 
   4217 `ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
   4218      Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
   4219      value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
   4220      absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
   4221      symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
   4222      Section::.
   4223 
   4224 `ADDR(SECTION)'
   4225      Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your
   4226      script must previously have defined the location of that section.
   4227      In the following example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned
   4228      identical values:
   4229           SECTIONS { ...
   4230             .output1 :
   4231               {
   4232               start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
   4233               ...
   4234               }
   4235             .output :
   4236               {
   4237               symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
   4238               symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
   4239               }
   4240           ... }
   4241 
   4242 `ALIGN(ALIGN)'
   4243 `ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
   4244      Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
   4245      to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
   4246      change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
   4247      on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
   4248      be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
   4249      ALIGN)').
   4250 
   4251      Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
   4252      next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
   4253      variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
   4254      input sections:
   4255           SECTIONS { ...
   4256             .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
   4257               *(.data)
   4258               variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
   4259             }
   4260           ... }
   4261      The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
   4262      location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
   4263      attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
   4264      Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
   4265      value of a symbol.
   4266 
   4267      The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
   4268 
   4269 `ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
   4270      Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
   4271      section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
   4272      when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
   4273      following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
   4274      stored as the first value in that section.
   4275           SECTIONS{ ...
   4276             .output {
   4277               LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
   4278               ...
   4279               }
   4280           ... }
   4281 
   4282 `BLOCK(EXP)'
   4283      This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
   4284      scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
   4285      output section.
   4286 
   4287 `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
   4288      This is equivalent to either
   4289           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
   4290      or
   4291           (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
   4292      depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
   4293      pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
   4294      expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
   4295      latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
   4296      memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
   4297      bytes in the on-disk file.
   4298 
   4299      This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
   4300      not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
   4301      script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
   4302      should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
   4303      for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
   4304 
   4305      Example:
   4306             . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
   4307 
   4308 `DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
   4309      This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
   4310      evaluation purposes.
   4311 
   4312             . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
   4313 
   4314 `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
   4315      This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
   4316      option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
   4317      option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
   4318      otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
   4319      aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
   4320      target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
   4321      between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
   4322 
   4323             . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
   4324 
   4325 `DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
   4326      Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
   4327      defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
   4328      return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
   4329      symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
   4330      set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
   4331      section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
   4332      is preserved:
   4333 
   4334           SECTIONS { ...
   4335             .text : {
   4336               begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
   4337               ...
   4338             }
   4339             ...
   4340           }
   4341 
   4342 `LENGTH(MEMORY)'
   4343      Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4344 
   4345 `LOADADDR(SECTION)'
   4346      Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  This is normally
   4347      the same as `ADDR', but it may be different if the `AT' attribute
   4348      is used in the output section definition (*note Output Section
   4349      LMA::).
   4350 
   4351 `MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4352      Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4353 
   4354 `MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
   4355      Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
   4356 
   4357 `NEXT(EXP)'
   4358      Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
   4359      This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
   4360      the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
   4361      file, the two functions are equivalent.
   4362 
   4363 `ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
   4364      Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
   4365 
   4366 `SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
   4367      Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
   4368      value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
   4369      option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
   4370      DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
   4371      used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
   4372      sections, but you use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
   4373 
   4374 `SIZEOF(SECTION)'
   4375      Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
   4376      been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
   4377      evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
   4378      example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
   4379           SECTIONS{ ...
   4380             .output {
   4381               .start = . ;
   4382               ...
   4383               .end = . ;
   4384               }
   4385             symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
   4386             symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
   4387           ... }
   4388 
   4389 `SIZEOF_HEADERS'
   4390 `sizeof_headers'
   4391      Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
   4392      information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
   4393      can use this number when setting the start address of the first
   4394      section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
   4395 
   4396      When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
   4397      `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
   4398      number of program headers before it has determined all the section
   4399      addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
   4400      additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
   4401      room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
   4402      using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
   4403      script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
   4404      headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
   4405      `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
   4406 
   4407 
   4408 File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
   4409 
   4410 3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
   4411 ============================
   4412 
   4413 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
   4414 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
   4415 linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
   4416 linker will report an error.
   4417 
   4418    An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
   4419 
   4420    Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
   4421 assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
   4422 
   4423    Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
   4424 read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
   4425 script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
   4426 
   4427 
   4428 File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
   4429 
   4430 4 Machine Dependent Features
   4431 ****************************
   4432 
   4433 `ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
   4434 describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
   4435 not listed.
   4436 
   4437 * Menu:
   4438 
   4439 
   4440 * H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
   4441 
   4442 * i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
   4443 
   4444 * ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
   4445 
   4446 * HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
   4447 
   4448 * M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4449 
   4450 * MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
   4451 
   4452 * MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
   4453 
   4454 * M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4455 
   4456 * PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4457 
   4458 * PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4459 
   4460 * SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4461 
   4462 * TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
   4463 
   4464 * WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   4465 
   4466 * Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   4467 
   4468 
   4469 File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4470 
   4471 4.1 `ld' and the H8/300
   4472 =======================
   4473 
   4474 For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
   4475 specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4476 
   4477 _relaxing address modes_
   4478      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4479      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4480      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4481 
   4482 _synthesizing instructions_
   4483      `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
   4484      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4485      changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
   4486      linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
   4487      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4488 
   4489 _bit manipulation instructions_
   4490      `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
   4491      biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
   4492      bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
   4493      to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
   4494      address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
   4495      into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
   4496      page of memory).
   4497 
   4498 _system control instructions_
   4499      `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
   4500      absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
   4501      changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
   4502      turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
   4503      address AA is in the top page of memory).
   4504 
   4505 
   4506 File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4507 
   4508 4.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
   4509 =================================
   4510 
   4511 You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
   4512 the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
   4513 specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
   4514 instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
   4515 strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
   4516 specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
   4517 loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
   4518 
   4519    For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
   4520 `-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
   4521 any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
   4522 
   4523      try
   4524      libtry.a
   4525      tryca
   4526      libtryca.a
   4527 
   4528 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
   4529 two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
   4530 
   4531    You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
   4532 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
   4533 each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
   4534 specifies a library.
   4535 
   4536    `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
   4537 specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
   4538 targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
   4539 relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
   4540 `cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
   4541 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
   4542 not itself call any subroutines).
   4543 
   4544 
   4545 File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4546 
   4547 4.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
   4548 ====================================================
   4549 
   4550 4.3.1 Linker Relaxation
   4551 -----------------------
   4552 
   4553 For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
   4554 when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
   4555 
   4556 _relaxing address modes_
   4557      `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
   4558      within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
   4559      relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
   4560 
   4561      `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
   4562      transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
   4563      page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
   4564 
   4565 _relaxing gcc instruction group_
   4566      When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
   4567      instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
   4568      addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
   4569      instructions.
   4570 
   4571 
   4572 4.3.2 Trampoline Generation
   4573 ---------------------------
   4574 
   4575 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
   4576 function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
   4577 the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
   4578 instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
   4579 pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
   4580 function trampoline.
   4581 
   4582 
   4583 File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4584 
   4585 4.4 `ld' and the ARM family
   4586 ===========================
   4587 
   4588 For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
   4589 between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
   4590 been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
   4591 option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
   4592 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
   4593 option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
   4594 given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
   4595 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
   4596 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
   4597 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
   4598 
   4599    The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
   4600 switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
   4601 sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
   4602 a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
   4603 straight away.
   4604 
   4605    The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
   4606 executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
   4607 The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
   4608 
   4609    The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
   4610 `.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
   4611 `R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
   4612 `--target1-abs' switches override the default.
   4613 
   4614    The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
   4615 `R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
   4616 and target defaults are as follows:
   4617 `rel'
   4618      `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
   4619 
   4620 `abs'
   4621      `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
   4622 
   4623 `got-rel'
   4624      `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
   4625 
   4626    The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
   4627 enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
   4628 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
   4629 but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
   4630 objects.
   4631 
   4632    In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
   4633 linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
   4634 PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
   4635 
   4636    In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
   4637 relocations are ignored.
   4638 
   4639    Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
   4640 with a branch to the following veneer:
   4641 
   4642      TST rM, #1
   4643      MOVEQ PC, rM
   4644      BX Rn
   4645 
   4646    This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
   4647 cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
   4648 clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
   4649 rare cases.
   4650 
   4651    The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
   4652 instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
   4653 Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
   4654 BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
   4655 entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
   4656 
   4657    This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
   4658 to specify it if you are using that target.
   4659 
   4660    The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
   4661 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
   4662 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
   4663 code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
   4664 before the support code can read the intended values.
   4665 
   4666    The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
   4667 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
   4668 register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
   4669 at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
   4670 only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
   4671 workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
   4672 further details.
   4673 
   4674    If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
   4675 workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
   4676 you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
   4677 if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
   4678 The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
   4679 
   4680    If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
   4681 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
   4682 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
   4683 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
   4684 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
   4685 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
   4686 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
   4687 
   4688    The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
   4689 when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
   4690 size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
   4691 object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
   4692 enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
   4693 diagnosed.
   4694 
   4695    The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
   4696 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
   4697 `wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
   4698 linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
   4699 using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
   4700 
   4701    The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
   4702 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
   4703 PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
   4704 used to generate relocatable binaries.
   4705 
   4706    The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
   4707 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
   4708 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
   4709 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
   4710 controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
   4711 placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
   4712 duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
   4713 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
   4714 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
   4715 where they should be placed.
   4716 
   4717    The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
   4718 controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
   4719 stubs are placed before the first branch that needs them.  If it is
   4720 positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
   4721 branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
   4722 then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
   4723 using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
   4724 smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
   4725 service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
   4726 
   4727    The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
   4728 
   4729    Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
   4730 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
   4731 otherwise.
   4732 
   4733 
   4734 File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4735 
   4736 4.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
   4737 ====================================
   4738 
   4739 When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
   4740 stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
   4741 `--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
   4742 different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
   4743 sub-spaces.
   4744 
   4745    Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
   4746 sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
   4747 specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
   4748 stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
   4749 serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
   4750 and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
   4751 require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
   4752 sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
   4753 `N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4754 negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
   4755 `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
   4756 groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
   4757 stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
   4758 
   4759    Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4760 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
   4761 create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
   4762 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
   4763 
   4764 
   4765 File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4766 
   4767 4.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
   4768 ====================================
   4769 
   4770 The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
   4771 choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
   4772 `target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
   4773 scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
   4774 single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
   4775 instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
   4776 negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   4777 `multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
   4778 file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
   4779 same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
   4780 different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
   4781 
   4782 
   4783 File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4784 
   4785 4.7 `ld' and MMIX
   4786 =================
   4787 
   4788 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
   4789 object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
   4790 format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
   4791 formats.
   4792 
   4793    There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
   4794 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
   4795 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
   4796 symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
   4797 `.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
   4798 register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
   4799 section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
   4800 `Main' for `mmo' files.
   4801 
   4802    Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
   4803 `__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
   4804 default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
   4805 section.
   4806 
   4807    Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
   4808 section, are left out from an mmo file.
   4809 
   4810 
   4811 File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4812 
   4813 4.8 `ld' and MSP430
   4814 ===================
   4815 
   4816 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
   4817 `-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
   4818 MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
   4819 the linker).
   4820 
   4821    The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
   4822 specific:
   4823 
   4824 ``.vectors''
   4825      Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
   4826 
   4827 ``.bootloader''
   4828      Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
   4829      code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4830 
   4831 ``.infomem''
   4832      Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
   4833      this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
   4834 
   4835 ``.infomemnobits''
   4836      This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
   4837      this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
   4838 
   4839 ``.noinit''
   4840      Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
   4841 
   4842      The last two sections are used by gcc.
   4843 
   4844 
   4845 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4846 
   4847 4.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
   4848 =======================================
   4849 
   4850 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
   4851 displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
   4852 fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
   4853 of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
   4854 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
   4855 be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.
   4856 
   4857 `--bss-plt'
   4858      Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
   4859      code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
   4860      security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
   4861      writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
   4862      `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
   4863      if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
   4864      compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
   4865      (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
   4866 
   4867 `--secure-plt'
   4868      `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
   4869      `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
   4870      linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
   4871      layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
   4872      old style BSS PLT.
   4873 
   4874 `--sdata-got'
   4875      The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
   4876      sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
   4877      location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
   4878      initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
   4879      reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
   4880      allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
   4881      relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
   4882      always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
   4883      accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
   4884      `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
   4885      use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
   4886      useful for other compilers that may do so.
   4887 
   4888 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4889      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4890      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4891 
   4892 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4893      PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
   4894      used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
   4895      the optimization.
   4896 
   4897 
   4898 File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4899 
   4900 4.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
   4901 ==========================================
   4902 
   4903 `--stub-group-size'
   4904      Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
   4905      placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
   4906      sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
   4907      group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
   4908      offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
   4909      sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
   4910      it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
   4911      it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
   4912      serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
   4913      chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
   4914      negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
   4915      and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
   4916      section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
   4917      behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
   4918      values of `N' respectively.
   4919 
   4920      Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
   4921      single input section larger than the group size specified will of
   4922      course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
   4923      are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
   4924      stub.
   4925 
   4926 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4927      This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
   4928      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   4929 
   4930 `--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
   4931      These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
   4932      a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
   4933      function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
   4934      a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
   4935      properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
   4936      to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
   4937      default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
   4938      Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
   4939 
   4940 `--no-tls-optimize'
   4941      PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
   4942      sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
   4943      disable the optimization.
   4944 
   4945 `--no-opd-optimize'
   4946      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
   4947      corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
   4948      by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
   4949      Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
   4950 
   4951 `--non-overlapping-opd'
   4952      Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
   4953      `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
   4954      the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
   4955      next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
   4956 
   4957 `--no-toc-optimize'
   4958      PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
   4959      Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
   4960      the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
   4961      a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
   4962      a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
   4963      relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
   4964      unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
   4965      reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
   4966      discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
   4967      reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
   4968      assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
   4969      disable the optimization.
   4970 
   4971 `--no-multi-toc'
   4972      By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
   4973      entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This limits the
   4974      total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this limit by
   4975      grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for
   4976      its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
   4977      inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input sections, so
   4978      cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc' section that
   4979      exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with `ld -r'.
   4980      Use this option to turn off this feature.
   4981 
   4982 
   4983 File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
   4984 
   4985 4.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
   4986 =============================
   4987 
   4988 `--plugin'
   4989      This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
   4990 
   4991 `--no-overlays'
   4992      Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
   4993      regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
   4994      `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
   4995      off all this special overlay handling.
   4996 
   4997 `--emit-stub-syms'
   4998      This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
   4999      that encodes the stub type and destination.
   5000 
   5001 `--extra-overlay-stubs'
   5002      This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
   5003      calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
   5004      calls to non-overlay regions.
   5005 
   5006 `--local-store=lo:hi'
   5007      `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
   5008      address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
   5009      range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
   5010 
   5011 `--stack-analysis'
   5012      SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
   5013      unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
   5014      under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
   5015      option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
   5016      `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
   5017      the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
   5018      stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
   5019      for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
   5020      for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
   5021      find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
   5022      recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
   5023      under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
   5024      for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
   5025      link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
   5026      stack usage and calls will be given.
   5027 
   5028 `--emit-stack-syms'
   5029      This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
   5030      `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
   5031      the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
   5032      `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
   5033      `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
   5034      the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
   5035      size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
   5036      section `SHN_ABS'.
   5037 
   5038 
   5039 File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5040 
   5041 4.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
   5042 ================================================
   5043 
   5044 The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
   5045 versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
   5046 supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
   5047 `ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
   5048 depends on the default specified by the specific target.
   5049 
   5050 
   5051 File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5052 
   5053 4.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
   5054 ==================================
   5055 
   5056 This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
   5057 *Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
   5058 command line options mentioned here.
   5059 
   5060 _import libraries_
   5061      The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
   5062      libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
   5063      are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
   5064      archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
   5065      for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
   5066      command line option.
   5067 
   5068 _exporting DLL symbols_
   5069      The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
   5070 
   5071     _using auto-export functionality_
   5072           By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
   5073           functionality, which is controlled by the following command
   5074           line options:
   5075 
   5076              * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
   5077 
   5078              * -exclude-symbols
   5079 
   5080              * -exclude-libs
   5081 
   5082           If, however, `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly
   5083           on the command line, then the default auto-export behavior
   5084           will be _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
   5085 
   5086              * A DEF file is used.
   5087 
   5088              * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
   5089                __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
   5090 
   5091     _using a DEF file_
   5092           Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
   5093           file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
   5094           should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
   5095           named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
   5096           to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
   5097           `.def' or `.DEF'.
   5098 
   5099                gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
   5100 
   5101           Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
   5102           unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
   5103 
   5104           Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
   5105           `xyz.dll':
   5106 
   5107                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
   5108 
   5109                EXPORTS
   5110                foo
   5111                bar
   5112                _bar = bar
   5113                another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
   5114                var1 DATA
   5115 
   5116           This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
   5117           and five symbols in the export table. The third exported
   5118           symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
   5119           `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
   5120           and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
   5121           `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
   5122           object.
   5123 
   5124           The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
   5125           name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5126           the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
   5127 
   5128           When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
   5129           than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
   5130           instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
   5131           the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
   5132 
   5133           With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
   5134           specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
   5135           non-default base address for the image.
   5136 
   5137           If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
   5138           or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
   5139           same as the filename specified on the command line.
   5140 
   5141           The complete specification of an export symbol is:
   5142 
   5143                EXPORTS
   5144                  ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
   5145                     | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
   5146                  [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
   5147 
   5148           Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
   5149           declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
   5150           declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
   5151           `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
   5152           the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
   5153           `<integer>' alias.
   5154 
   5155           The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
   5156 
   5157           `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
   5158           table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
   5159           (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
   5160           otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
   5161           name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
   5162           any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
   5163 
   5164           `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
   5165           function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
   5166           reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
   5167           be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
   5168 
   5169           `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
   5170           well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
   5171           read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
   5172           to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
   5173           code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
   5174           explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
   5175           attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
   5176 
   5177           `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
   5178           not put it into the static import library used to resolve
   5179           imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
   5180           the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
   5181           using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
   5182           without an import library.
   5183 
   5184           See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
   5185           specification of other DEF file statements
   5186 
   5187           While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
   5188           with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
   5189 
   5190     _Using decorations_
   5191           Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
   5192           source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
   5193           to be exported is declared as:
   5194 
   5195                __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
   5196                __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5197 
   5198           All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
   5199           any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
   5200           in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
   5201           disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
   5202           used.
   5203 
   5204           Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
   5205           _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
   5206           dllimport, instead:
   5207 
   5208                __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
   5209                __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
   5210 
   5211           This complicates the structure of library header files,
   5212           because when included by the library itself the header must
   5213           declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
   5214           included by client code the header must declare them as
   5215           dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
   5216           used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
   5217           declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
   5218           `automatic data imports' for more information.
   5219 
   5220 _automatic data imports_
   5221      The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
   5222      only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
   5223      let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
   5224      with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
   5225      existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
   5226      libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
   5227      initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
   5228      decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
   5229      POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
   5230      `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
   5231      by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
   5232      itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
   5233      ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
   5234 
   5235      auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
   5236      additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
   5237 
   5238      "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
   5239      documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
   5240 
   5241      The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
   5242      occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
   5243      difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
   5244      feature, described below.
   5245 
   5246      For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
   5247      classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
   5248      variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
   5249      particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
   5250      the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
   5251      fixing these references at runtime without the additional
   5252      information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
   5253      standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
   5254      these references.
   5255 
   5256      The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
   5257      references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
   5258      adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
   5259      to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
   5260      versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
   5261      provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
   5262      support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
   5263      compiled result will run without error on an older system.
   5264 
   5265      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
   5266      explicitly enabled as needed.
   5267 
   5268 _direct linking to a dll_
   5269      The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
   5270      including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
   5271      libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
   5272      does the traditional import library method, especially when
   5273      linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
   5274      import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
   5275      stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
   5276      exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
   5277      processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
   5278      tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
   5279      particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
   5280 
   5281      Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
   5282      other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
   5283      number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
   5284      the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
   5285      order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
   5286 
   5287      For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
   5288      attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
   5289 
   5290           libxxx.dll.a
   5291           xxx.dll.a
   5292           libxxx.a
   5293           xxx.lib
   5294           cygxxx.dll (*)
   5295           libxxx.dll
   5296           xxx.dll
   5297 
   5298      before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
   5299 
   5300      (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
   5301      `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
   5302      `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
   5303      standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
   5304      effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
   5305 
   5306      Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
   5307      use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
   5308      of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
   5309      conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
   5310      environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
   5311      could coexist on the same machine.
   5312 
   5313      The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
   5314      applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
   5315      libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
   5316 
   5317           bin/
   5318           	cygxxx.dll
   5319           lib/
   5320           	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
   5321           	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
   5322 
   5323      Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
   5324      done two ways:
   5325 
   5326      1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
   5327           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
   5328 
   5329      However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
   5330      names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
   5331      specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
   5332      libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
   5333 
   5334      2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
   5335      directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
   5336      should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
   5337      making the app/dll.
   5338 
   5339           ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
   5340 
   5341      Then you can link without any make environment changes.
   5342 
   5343           gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
   5344 
   5345      This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
   5346      the following is perfectly legal
   5347 
   5348           bin/
   5349           	cygxxx-5.dll
   5350           lib/
   5351           	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
   5352 
   5353      Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
   5354      even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
   5355      `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
   5356 
   5357      Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
   5358      justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
   5359      are three reasons:
   5360 
   5361      1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
   5362      work with auto-imported data.
   5363 
   5364      2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
   5365      the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
   5366      indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
   5367      the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
   5368      and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
   5369 
   5370      3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
   5371      is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
   5372      API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
   5373      of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
   5374 
   5375      So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
   5376      true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
   5377      dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
   5378      binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
   5379      massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
   5380      requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
   5381      will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
   5382 
   5383 _symbol aliasing_
   5384 
   5385     _adding additional names_
   5386           Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
   5387           names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
   5388           also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
   5389           DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
   5390           optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
   5391           file:
   5392 
   5393                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5394 
   5395                EXPORTS
   5396                foo
   5397                _foo = foo
   5398 
   5399           The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
   5400 
   5401           Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
   5402           the source code using the "weak" attribute:
   5403 
   5404                void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
   5405                void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
   5406 
   5407           See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
   5408           weak symbols.
   5409 
   5410     _renaming symbols_
   5411           Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
   5412           cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
   5413           exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
   5414           directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
   5415           library, if it is created).  In the following example:
   5416 
   5417                LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
   5418 
   5419                EXPORTS
   5420                _foo = foo
   5421 
   5422           The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
   5423           `_foo'.
   5424 
   5425      Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
   5426      unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
   5427      If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
   5428      _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
   5429      are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
   5430      option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
   5431      use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
   5432      both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
   5433      symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
   5434      symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
   5435 
   5436 _weak externals_
   5437      The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
   5438      called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
   5439      symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
   5440      other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
   5441         * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
   5442           historically called lazy externals.
   5443 
   5444         * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
   5445           libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
   5446 
   5447         * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
   5448           implemented.
   5449      As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
   5450      symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
   5451      the symbol uses a default value.
   5452 
   5453 
   5454 File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
   5455 
   5456 4.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
   5457 ===============================
   5458 
   5459 The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
   5460 `SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
   5461 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
   5462 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
   5463 example, with the command:
   5464 
   5465      SECTIONS
   5466      {
   5467        .text : {
   5468          *(.literal .text)
   5469        }
   5470      }
   5471 
   5472 `ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
   5473 different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
   5474 range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
   5475 the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
   5476 `.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
   5477 from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
   5478 the files would follow.
   5479 
   5480    Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
   5481 provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
   5482 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
   5483 literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
   5484 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
   5485 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
   5486 the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
   5487 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
   5488 `L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
   5489 `CALLN' instructions.
   5490 
   5491    For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
   5492 optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
   5493 instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
   5494 and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
   5495 not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
   5496 reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
   5497 alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
   5498 always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
   5499 between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
   5500 inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
   5501 If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
   5502 option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
   5503 instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
   5504 are required for correctness.
   5505 
   5506    The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
   5507 control the linker:
   5508 
   5509 `--no-relax'
   5510      Since the Xtensa version of `ld' enables the `--relax' option by
   5511      default, the `--no-relax' option is provided to disable relaxation.
   5512 
   5513 `--size-opt'
   5514      When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
   5515      size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
   5516      insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
   5517      target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
   5518      required to preserve the correctness of the code.
   5519 
   5520 
   5521 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
   5522 
   5523 5 BFD
   5524 *****
   5525 
   5526 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
   5527 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
   5528 object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
   5529 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
   5530 it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
   5531 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
   5532 object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
   5533 objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
   5534 your configuration.
   5535 
   5536    As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
   5537 conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
   5538 efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
   5539 would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
   5540 offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
   5541 back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
   5542 greater speed.
   5543 
   5544    One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
   5545 is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
   5546 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
   5547 conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
   5548 
   5549 * Menu:
   5550 
   5551 * BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
   5552 
   5553 
   5554 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
   5555 
   5556 5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
   5557 ===================================
   5558 
   5559 When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
   5560 the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
   5561 memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
   5562 the object file's data structures.
   5563 
   5564    As different information from the object files is required, BFD
   5565 reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
   5566 example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
   5567 tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
   5568 the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
   5569 format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
   5570 calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
   5571 back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
   5572 linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
   5573 and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
   5574 end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
   5575 convert it into the chosen output format.
   5576 
   5577 * Menu:
   5578 
   5579 * BFD information loss::	Information Loss
   5580 * Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
   5581 
   5582 
   5583 File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
   5584 
   5585 5.1.1 Information Loss
   5586 ----------------------
   5587 
   5588 _Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
   5589 by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
   5590 be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
   5591 example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
   5592 in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
   5593 contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
   5594 image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
   5595 output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
   5596 internally, so the link is performed correctly).
   5597 
   5598    Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
   5599 unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
   5600 the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
   5601 (e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
   5602 the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
   5603 describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
   5604 command language.
   5605 
   5606    _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
   5607 canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
   5608 structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
   5609 internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
   5610 possible data richness through the transformation between external to
   5611 internal and back to external formats.
   5612 
   5613    This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
   5614 format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
   5615 maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
   5616 form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
   5617 to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
   5618 is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
   5619 end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
   5620 is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
   5621 able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
   5622 information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
   5623 commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
   5624 linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
   5625 `b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
   5626 lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
   5627 
   5628 
   5629 File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
   5630 
   5631 5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
   5632 ------------------------------------------
   5633 
   5634 The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
   5635 least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
   5636 that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
   5637 format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
   5638 understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
   5639 conversions.  
   5640 
   5641 _files_
   5642      Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
   5643      architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
   5644      pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
   5645      magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
   5646      so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
   5647      write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
   5648      stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
   5649      files may be used with one another.
   5650 
   5651 _sections_
   5652      Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
   5653      the section's original address in the object file, size and
   5654      alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
   5655      data structures.
   5656 
   5657 _symbols_
   5658      Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
   5659      file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
   5660      flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
   5661      relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
   5662      section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
   5663      symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
   5664      varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
   5665      the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
   5666      for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
   5667      of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
   5668 
   5669      Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
   5670      so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
   5671      pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
   5672      Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
   5673      information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
   5674      This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
   5675      linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
   5676 
   5677      There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
   5678      format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
   5679      example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
   5680      within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
   5681      information will be preserved.
   5682 
   5683 _relocation level_
   5684      Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
   5685      symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
   5686      section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
   5687      descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
   5688      the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
   5689      relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
   5690      method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
   5691      instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
   5692      record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
   5693      routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
   5694      byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
   5695      such relocation type.
   5696 
   5697 _line numbers_
   5698      Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
   5699      mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
   5700      output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
   5701      symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
   5702      number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
   5703      of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
   5704      allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
   5705      is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
   5706      offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
   5707      simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
   5708      formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
   5709 
   5710 
   5711 File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
   5712 
   5713 6 Reporting Bugs
   5714 ****************
   5715 
   5716 Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
   5717 
   5718    Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
   5719 or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
   5720 is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
   5721 better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
   5722 
   5723    In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
   5724 information that enables us to fix the bug.
   5725 
   5726 * Menu:
   5727 
   5728 * Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
   5729 * Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
   5730 
   5731 
   5732 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5733 
   5734 6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
   5735 =========================
   5736 
   5737 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
   5738 guidelines:
   5739 
   5740    * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
   5741      a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
   5742 
   5743    * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
   5744 
   5745    * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
   5746      may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
   5747      object files are correct.
   5748 
   5749    * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
   5750      improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
   5751 
   5752 
   5753 File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
   5754 
   5755 6.2 How to Report Bugs
   5756 ======================
   5757 
   5758 A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
   5759 If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
   5760 contact that organization first.
   5761 
   5762    You can find contact information for many support companies and
   5763 individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
   5764 
   5765    Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
   5766 `http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
   5767 
   5768    The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
   5769 *report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
   5770 leave it out, state it!
   5771 
   5772    Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
   5773 problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
   5774 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
   5775 Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
   5776 is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
   5777 where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
   5778 different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
   5779 doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
   5780 specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
   5781 and the most helpful.
   5782 
   5783    Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
   5784 the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
   5785 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
   5786 
   5787    Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
   5788 bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
   5789 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
   5790 might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
   5791 
   5792    To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
   5793 
   5794    * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
   5795      `--version' argument.
   5796 
   5797      Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
   5798      looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
   5799 
   5800    * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
   5801      patches made to the `BFD' library.
   5802 
   5803    * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
   5804      and version number.
   5805 
   5806    * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
   5807      "`gcc-2.7'".
   5808 
   5809    * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
   5810      observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
   5811      important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
   5812      from make) is sufficient.
   5813 
   5814      If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
   5815      wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
   5816 
   5817    * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
   5818      the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
   5819      files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
   5820      10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
   5821      or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
   5822      file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
   5823      going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
   5824      large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
   5825 
   5826      If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
   5827      `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
   5828      object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
   5829      `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
   5830      `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
   5831 
   5832    * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
   5833      incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
   5834 
   5835      Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
   5836      will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
   5837      might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
   5838      not give us a chance to make a mistake.
   5839 
   5840      Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
   5841      still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
   5842      such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
   5843      a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
   5844      copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
   5845      crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
   5846      was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
   5847      crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
   5848      observations.
   5849 
   5850    * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
   5851      diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
   5852      Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
   5853      discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
   5854      by line number.
   5855 
   5856      The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
   5857      in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
   5858      information to us.
   5859 
   5860    Here are some things that are not necessary:
   5861 
   5862    * A description of the envelope of the bug.
   5863 
   5864      Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
   5865      which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
   5866      changes will not affect it.
   5867 
   5868      This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
   5869      we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
   5870      debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
   5871      examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
   5872 
   5873      Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
   5874      of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
   5875      output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
   5876      less time, and so on.
   5877 
   5878      However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
   5879      this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
   5880      used.
   5881 
   5882    * A patch for the bug.
   5883 
   5884      A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
   5885      omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
   5886      assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
   5887      with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
   5888      might not understand it at all.
   5889 
   5890      Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
   5891      construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
   5892      path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
   5893      not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
   5894      that the bug is fixed.
   5895 
   5896      And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
   5897      your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
   5898      test case will help us to understand.
   5899 
   5900    * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
   5901 
   5902      Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
   5903      such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
   5904 
   5905 
   5906 File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
   5907 
   5908 Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
   5909 **************************************
   5910 
   5911 To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
   5912 `ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
   5913 more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
   5914 Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
   5915 set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
   5916 supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
   5917 described here.
   5918 
   5919    In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
   5920 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
   5921 features to make use of them.
   5922 
   5923    You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
   5924 `-c' command-line option.
   5925 
   5926    Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
   5927 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
   5928 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
   5929 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
   5930 a warning message, but continues processing the script.
   5931 
   5932    Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
   5933 
   5934    You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
   5935 lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
   5936 list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
   5937 
   5938 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
   5939 `ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   5940      Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
   5941      the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
   5942      use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
   5943      present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
   5944      at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
   5945      `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
   5946      still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
   5947      line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
   5948 
   5949 `ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
   5950      Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
   5951      in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
   5952 
   5953      IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
   5954 
   5955 `ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
   5956      Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
   5957      should be a power of two.
   5958 
   5959 `BASE EXPRESSION'
   5960      Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
   5961      absolute addresses) in the output file.
   5962 
   5963 `CHIP EXPRESSION'
   5964 `CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
   5965      This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
   5966 
   5967 `END'
   5968      This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
   5969      compatibility.
   5970 
   5971 `FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
   5972      Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
   5973      language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
   5974 
   5975        1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
   5976 
   5977        2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
   5978 
   5979        3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
   5980           `COFF'
   5981 
   5982 `LIST ANYTHING...'
   5983      Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
   5984      `ld' command-line option `-M'.
   5985 
   5986      The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
   5987      with no change in its effect.
   5988 
   5989 `LOAD FILENAME'
   5990 `LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
   5991      Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
   5992      same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
   5993      line.
   5994 
   5995 `NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
   5996      OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
   5997      MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
   5998      option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
   5999 
   6000 `ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
   6001 `ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
   6002      Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
   6003      in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
   6004      MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
   6005      `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
   6006      first in your output file, in the order specified.
   6007 
   6008 `PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
   6009 `PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
   6010 `PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
   6011      Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
   6012      linker input files.
   6013 
   6014 `SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
   6015 `SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
   6016 `SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
   6017      You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
   6018      specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
   6019      you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
   6020      the _first_ sets the start address.
   6021 
   6022 
   6023 File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
   6024 
   6025 Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
   6026 *****************************************
   6027 
   6028                         Version 1.1, March 2000
   6029 
   6030      Copyright (C) 2000, 2003 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
   6031      51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA  02110-1301  USA
   6032 
   6033      Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
   6034      of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
   6035 
   6036 
   6037   0. PREAMBLE
   6038 
   6039      The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
   6040      written document "free" in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone
   6041      the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without
   6042      modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.  Secondarily,
   6043      this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get
   6044      credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for
   6045      modifications made by others.
   6046 
   6047      This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
   6048      works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
   6049      It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
   6050      license designed for free software.
   6051 
   6052      We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
   6053      free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
   6054      free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
   6055      that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
   6056      software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
   6057      of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
   6058      We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
   6059      instruction or reference.
   6060 
   6061 
   6062   1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
   6063 
   6064      This License applies to any manual or other work that contains a
   6065      notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed
   6066      under the terms of this License.  The "Document", below, refers to
   6067      any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a licensee,
   6068      and is addressed as "you."
   6069 
   6070      A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
   6071      Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
   6072      modifications and/or translated into another language.
   6073 
   6074      A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter
   6075      section of the Document that deals exclusively with the
   6076      relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the
   6077      Document's overall subject (or to related matters) and contains
   6078      nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject.
   6079      (For example, if the Document is in part a textbook of
   6080      mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.)
   6081      The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with
   6082      the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial,
   6083      philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
   6084 
   6085      The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
   6086      titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
   6087      the notice that says that the Document is released under this
   6088      License.
   6089 
   6090      The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
   6091      listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
   6092      that says that the Document is released under this License.
   6093 
   6094      A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
   6095      represented in a format whose specification is available to the
   6096      general public, whose contents can be viewed and edited directly
   6097      and straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
   6098      composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
   6099      widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
   6100      text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
   6101      formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
   6102      otherwise Transparent file format whose markup has been designed
   6103      to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not
   6104      Transparent.  A copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque."
   6105 
   6106      Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
   6107      ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
   6108      SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
   6109      standard-conforming simple HTML designed for human modification.
   6110      Opaque formats include PostScript, PDF, proprietary formats that
   6111      can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML
   6112      or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
   6113      available, and the machine-generated HTML produced by some word
   6114      processors for output purposes only.
   6115 
   6116      The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
   6117      plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
   6118      material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
   6119      works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
   6120      Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
   6121      work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
   6122 
   6123   2. VERBATIM COPYING
   6124 
   6125      You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
   6126      commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
   6127      copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
   6128      applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
   6129      add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
   6130      may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
   6131      or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
   6132      you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
   6133      distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
   6134      the conditions in section 3.
   6135 
   6136      You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
   6137      and you may publicly display copies.
   6138 
   6139   3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
   6140 
   6141      If you publish printed copies of the Document numbering more than
   6142      100, and the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you
   6143      must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly,
   6144      all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
   6145      Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
   6146      and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
   6147      front cover must present the full title with all words of the
   6148      title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
   6149      on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
   6150      covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
   6151      satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
   6152      other respects.
   6153 
   6154      If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
   6155      legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
   6156      reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
   6157      adjacent pages.
   6158 
   6159      If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
   6160      numbering more than 100, you must either include a
   6161      machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
   6162      state in or with each Opaque copy a publicly-accessible
   6163      computer-network location containing a complete Transparent copy
   6164      of the Document, free of added material, which the general
   6165      network-using public has access to download anonymously at no
   6166      charge using public-standard network protocols.  If you use the
   6167      latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
   6168      begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
   6169      this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
   6170      location until at least one year after the last time you
   6171      distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
   6172      retailers) of that edition to the public.
   6173 
   6174      It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
   6175      the Document well before redistributing any large number of
   6176      copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
   6177      version of the Document.
   6178 
   6179   4. MODIFICATIONS
   6180 
   6181      You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
   6182      under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
   6183      release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
   6184      the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
   6185      licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
   6186      whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
   6187      things in the Modified Version:
   6188 
   6189      A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
   6190      distinct    from that of the Document, and from those of previous
   6191      versions    (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
   6192      History section    of the Document).  You may use the same title
   6193      as a previous version    if the original publisher of that version
   6194      gives permission.
   6195      B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
   6196      entities    responsible for authorship of the modifications in the
   6197      Modified    Version, together with at least five of the principal
   6198      authors of the    Document (all of its principal authors, if it
   6199      has less than five).
   6200      C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
   6201      Modified Version, as the publisher.
   6202      D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
   6203      E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
   6204      adjacent to the other copyright notices.
   6205      F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
   6206      notice    giving the public permission to use the Modified Version
   6207      under the    terms of this License, in the form shown in the
   6208      Addendum below.
   6209      G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
   6210      Sections    and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
   6211      license notice.
   6212      H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
   6213      I. Preserve the section entitled "History", and its title, and add
   6214      to    it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
   6215        publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.
   6216      If    there is no section entitled "History" in the Document,
   6217      create one    stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of
   6218      the Document as    given on its Title Page, then add an item
   6219      describing the Modified    Version as stated in the previous
   6220      sentence.
   6221      J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
   6222        public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
   6223      likewise    the network locations given in the Document for
   6224      previous versions    it was based on.  These may be placed in the
   6225      "History" section.     You may omit a network location for a work
   6226      that was published at    least four years before the Document
   6227      itself, or if the original    publisher of the version it refers
   6228      to gives permission.
   6229      K. In any section entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
   6230      preserve the section's title, and preserve in the section all the
   6231       substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements
   6232      and/or dedications given therein.
   6233      L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
   6234      unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
   6235      or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
   6236      M. Delete any section entitled "Endorsements."  Such a section
   6237      may not be included in the Modified Version.
   6238      N. Do not retitle any existing section as "Endorsements"    or to
   6239      conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
   6240 
   6241      If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
   6242      appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
   6243      material copied from the Document, you may at your option
   6244      designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
   6245      add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
   6246      Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
   6247      other section titles.
   6248 
   6249      You may add a section entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
   6250      nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
   6251      parties-for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
   6252      been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition
   6253      of a standard.
   6254 
   6255      You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
   6256      and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
   6257      of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
   6258      passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
   6259      added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
   6260      Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
   6261      previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
   6262      you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
   6263      replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
   6264      publisher that added the old one.
   6265 
   6266      The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
   6267      License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
   6268      assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
   6269 
   6270   5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
   6271 
   6272      You may combine the Document with other documents released under
   6273      this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
   6274      modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
   6275      all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
   6276      unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
   6277      combined work in its license notice.
   6278 
   6279      The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
   6280      multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
   6281      copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
   6282      but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
   6283      by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
   6284      original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
   6285      unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
   6286      the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
   6287      combined work.
   6288 
   6289      In the combination, you must combine any sections entitled
   6290      "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
   6291      entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections entitled
   6292      "Acknowledgements", and any sections entitled "Dedications."  You
   6293      must delete all sections entitled "Endorsements."
   6294 
   6295   6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
   6296 
   6297      You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
   6298      documents released under this License, and replace the individual
   6299      copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
   6300      that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
   6301      rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
   6302      documents in all other respects.
   6303 
   6304      You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
   6305      distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
   6306      a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
   6307      this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
   6308      that document.
   6309 
   6310   7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
   6311 
   6312      A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
   6313      separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
   6314      a storage or distribution medium, does not as a whole count as a
   6315      Modified Version of the Document, provided no compilation
   6316      copyright is claimed for the compilation.  Such a compilation is
   6317      called an "aggregate", and this License does not apply to the
   6318      other self-contained works thus compiled with the Document, on
   6319      account of their being thus compiled, if they are not themselves
   6320      derivative works of the Document.
   6321 
   6322      If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
   6323      copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one
   6324      quarter of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be
   6325      placed on covers that surround only the Document within the
   6326      aggregate.  Otherwise they must appear on covers around the whole
   6327      aggregate.
   6328 
   6329   8. TRANSLATION
   6330 
   6331      Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
   6332      distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
   6333      4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
   6334      permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
   6335      translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
   6336      original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
   6337      translation of this License provided that you also include the
   6338      original English version of this License.  In case of a
   6339      disagreement between the translation and the original English
   6340      version of this License, the original English version will prevail.
   6341 
   6342   9. TERMINATION
   6343 
   6344      You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
   6345      except as expressly provided for under this License.  Any other
   6346      attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is
   6347      void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this
   6348      License.  However, parties who have received copies, or rights,
   6349      from you under this License will not have their licenses
   6350      terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
   6351 
   6352  10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
   6353 
   6354      The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
   6355      the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
   6356      versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
   6357      differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
   6358      http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
   6359 
   6360      Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
   6361      number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
   6362      version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
   6363      have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
   6364      that specified version or of any later version that has been
   6365      published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
   6366      the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
   6367      you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
   6368      Free Software Foundation.
   6369 
   6370 
   6371 ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
   6372 ====================================================
   6373 
   6374 To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
   6375 the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
   6376 notices just after the title page:
   6377 
   6378      Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
   6379      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
   6380      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1
   6381      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
   6382      with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
   6383      Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
   6384      A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
   6385      Free Documentation License."
   6386 
   6387    If you have no Invariant Sections, write "with no Invariant Sections"
   6388 instead of saying which ones are invariant.  If you have no Front-Cover
   6389 Texts, write "no Front-Cover Texts" instead of "Front-Cover Texts being
   6390 LIST"; likewise for Back-Cover Texts.
   6391 
   6392    If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
   6393 recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
   6394 free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
   6395 permit their use in free software.
   6396 
   6397 
   6398 File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
   6399 
   6400 LD Index
   6401 ********
   6402 
   6403 [index]
   6404 * Menu:
   6405 
   6406 * ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
   6407 * -(:                                    Options.            (line  645)
   6408 * --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  663)
   6409 * --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  685)
   6410 * --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1470)
   6411 * --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  910)
   6412 * --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  916)
   6413 * --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  106)
   6414 * --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  673)
   6415 * --auxiliary:                           Options.            (line  207)
   6416 * --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 1815)
   6417 * --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1475)
   6418 * --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   23)
   6419 * --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6420 * --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1432)
   6421 * --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1432)
   6422 * --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  767)
   6423 * --cref:                                Options.            (line  777)
   6424 * --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line  944)
   6425 * --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  490)
   6426 * --default-symver:                      Options.            (line  940)
   6427 * --defsym SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  805)
   6428 * --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  818)
   6429 * --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1622)
   6430 * --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1757)
   6431 * --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1395)
   6432 * --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1770)
   6433 * --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1485)
   6434 * --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  536)
   6435 * --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  540)
   6436 * --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1480)
   6437 * --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1628)
   6438 * --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6439 * --dynamic-linker FILE:                 Options.            (line  831)
   6440 * --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  759)
   6441 * --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  763)
   6442 * --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  756)
   6443 * --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  743)
   6444 * --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1391)
   6445 * --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  425)
   6446 * --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
   6447 * --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   6448 * --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6449 * --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
   6450 * --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1614)
   6451 * --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1637)
   6452 * --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1775)
   6453 * --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1395)
   6454 * --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1762)
   6455 * --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1485)
   6456 * --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  160)
   6457 * --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1344)
   6458 * --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  170)
   6459 * --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1527)
   6460 * --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1503)
   6461 * --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  181)
   6462 * --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   6463 * --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  837)
   6464 * --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1533)
   6465 * --filter:                              Options.            (line  228)
   6466 * --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   44)
   6467 * --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   57)
   6468 * --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  434)
   6469 * --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  842)
   6470 * --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  117)
   6471 * --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   6472 * --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  852)
   6473 * --got:                                 Options.            (line 1828)
   6474 * --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
   6475 * --gpsize:                              Options.            (line  261)
   6476 * --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1404)
   6477 * --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1412)
   6478 * --heap:                                Options.            (line 1539)
   6479 * --help:                                Options.            (line  883)
   6480 * --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1546)
   6481 * --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  457)
   6482 * --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1555)
   6483 * --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1560)
   6484 * --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  320)
   6485 * --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  287)
   6486 * --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   6487 * --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1569)
   6488 * --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1574)
   6489 * --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1578)
   6490 * --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1583)
   6491 * --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1588)
   6492 * --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1592)
   6493 * --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  141)
   6494 * --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6495 * --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  389)
   6496 * --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  663)
   6497 * --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  685)
   6498 * --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  916)
   6499 * --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  673)
   6500 * --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  767)
   6501 * --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  789)
   6502 * --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  818)
   6503 * --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6504 * --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  106)
   6505 * --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  837)
   6506 * --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  852)
   6507 * --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  895)
   6508 * --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6509 * --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  403)
   6510 * --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6511 * --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   6512 * --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  874)
   6513 * --no-relax:                            Xtensa.             (line   56)
   6514 * --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6515 * --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
   6516 * --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6517 * --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 1809)
   6518 * --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  902)
   6519 * --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line  935)
   6520 * --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line  948)
   6521 * --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line  957)
   6522 * --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  113)
   6523 * --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line  961)
   6524 * --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line  965)
   6525 * --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6526 * --oformat:                             Options.            (line  977)
   6527 * --omagic:                              Options.            (line  394)
   6528 * --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1605)
   6529 * --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1597)
   6530 * --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  409)
   6531 * --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line  990)
   6532 * --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  119)
   6533 * --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   6534 * --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  874)
   6535 * --print-map:                           Options.            (line  352)
   6536 * --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1418)
   6537 * --relax:                               Options.            (line 1006)
   6538 * --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
   6539 * --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6540 * --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
   6541 * --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  438)
   6542 * --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  481)
   6543 * --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
   6544 * --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1780)
   6545 * --section-start SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1181)
   6546 * --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   23)
   6547 * --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1126)
   6548 * --sort-section alignment:              Options.            (line 1138)
   6549 * --sort-section name:                   Options.            (line 1134)
   6550 * --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1142)
   6551 * --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1147)
   6552 * --stack:                               Options.            (line 1786)
   6553 * --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   6554 * --stats:                               Options.            (line 1160)
   6555 * --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  468)
   6556 * --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  472)
   6557 * --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6558 * --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6559 * --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  124)
   6560 * --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1793)
   6561 * --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
   6562 * --sysroot:                             Options.            (line 1164)
   6563 * --target-help:                         Options.            (line  887)
   6564 * --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6565 * --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   27)
   6566 * --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   32)
   6567 * --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
   6568 * --trace:                               Options.            (line  477)
   6569 * --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  546)
   6570 * --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1169)
   6571 * --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  503)
   6572 * --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  521)
   6573 * --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1196)
   6574 * --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   69)
   6575 * --verbose:                             Options.            (line 1225)
   6576 * --version:                             Options.            (line  530)
   6577 * --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1231)
   6578 * --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   78)
   6579 * --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1238)
   6580 * --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1306)
   6581 * --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1311)
   6582 * --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1325)
   6583 * --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1329)
   6584 * --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1336)
   6585 * --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1339)
   6586 * --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1348)
   6587 * --wrap:                                Options.            (line 1362)
   6588 * -AARCH:                                Options.            (line  105)
   6589 * -aKEYWORD:                             Options.            (line   98)
   6590 * -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  695)
   6591 * -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  117)
   6592 * -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  698)
   6593 * -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  708)
   6594 * -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1118)
   6595 * -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  715)
   6596 * -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  730)
   6597 * -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  737)
   6598 * -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  141)
   6599 * -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  698)
   6600 * -d:                                    Options.            (line  151)
   6601 * -dc:                                   Options.            (line  151)
   6602 * -dn:                                   Options.            (line  715)
   6603 * -dp:                                   Options.            (line  151)
   6604 * -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  490)
   6605 * -dy:                                   Options.            (line  698)
   6606 * -E:                                    Options.            (line  181)
   6607 * -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  160)
   6608 * -EB:                                   Options.            (line  200)
   6609 * -EL:                                   Options.            (line  203)
   6610 * -F:                                    Options.            (line  228)
   6611 * -f:                                    Options.            (line  207)
   6612 * -fini:                                 Options.            (line  252)
   6613 * -G:                                    Options.            (line  261)
   6614 * -g:                                    Options.            (line  258)
   6615 * -hNAME:                                Options.            (line  269)
   6616 * -i:                                    Options.            (line  278)
   6617 * -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  831)
   6618 * -init:                                 Options.            (line  281)
   6619 * -LDIR:                                 Options.            (line  320)
   6620 * -lNAMESPEC:                            Options.            (line  287)
   6621 * -M:                                    Options.            (line  352)
   6622 * -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  342)
   6623 * -Map:                                  Options.            (line  891)
   6624 * -N:                                    Options.            (line  394)
   6625 * -n:                                    Options.            (line  389)
   6626 * -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  715)
   6627 * -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line  971)
   6628 * -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  415)
   6629 * -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  409)
   6630 * -pie:                                  Options.            (line  990)
   6631 * -q:                                    Options.            (line  425)
   6632 * -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1000)
   6633 * -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1003)
   6634 * -r:                                    Options.            (line  438)
   6635 * -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  457)
   6636 * -rpath:                                Options.            (line 1041)
   6637 * -rpath-link:                           Options.            (line 1063)
   6638 * -S:                                    Options.            (line  472)
   6639 * -s:                                    Options.            (line  468)
   6640 * -shared:                               Options.            (line 1118)
   6641 * -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  269)
   6642 * -static:                               Options.            (line  715)
   6643 * -t:                                    Options.            (line  477)
   6644 * -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  481)
   6645 * -Tbss ORG:                             Options.            (line 1190)
   6646 * -Tdata ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
   6647 * -Ttext ORG:                            Options.            (line 1190)
   6648 * -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  503)
   6649 * -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  511)
   6650 * -V:                                    Options.            (line  530)
   6651 * -v:                                    Options.            (line  530)
   6652 * -X:                                    Options.            (line  540)
   6653 * -x:                                    Options.            (line  536)
   6654 * -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  555)
   6655 * -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  546)
   6656 * -z defs:                               Options.            (line  902)
   6657 * -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  559)
   6658 * -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  910)
   6659 * .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6660 * /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
   6661                                                              (line   21)
   6662 * :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
   6663                                                              (line    6)
   6664 * =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
   6665                                                              (line    6)
   6666 * >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
   6667                                                              (line    6)
   6668 * [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
   6669                                                              (line   29)
   6670 * ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
   6671 * absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   6672 * absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6673 * ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6674 * ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   6675 * address, section:                      Output Section Address.
   6676                                                              (line    6)
   6677 * ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
   6678 * ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
   6679 * align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6680 * align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6681 * ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6682 * ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   6683 * ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
   6684                                                              (line    6)
   6685 * ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   6686 * allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6687 * architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
   6688                                                              (line   72)
   6689 * architectures:                         Options.            (line  105)
   6690 * archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  287)
   6691 * archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   6692 * arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
   6693 * arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
   6694 * ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
   6695 * AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
   6696 * ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6697                                                              (line    9)
   6698 * assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
   6699                                                              (line    9)
   6700 * assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
   6701 * AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6702 * AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6703 * automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  170)
   6704 * back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
   6705 * BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
   6706 * BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   23)
   6707 * BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6708 * BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
   6709 * big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  200)
   6710 * binary input format:                   Options.            (line  117)
   6711 * BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   75)
   6712 * bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
   6713 * bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6714 * bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   6715 * BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6716                                                              (line    6)
   6717 * C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
   6718                                                              (line   19)
   6719 * CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
   6720 * COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6721 * combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1238)
   6722 * command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
   6723 * command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
   6724 * common allocation:                     Options.            (line  151)
   6725 * common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
   6726                                                              (line   20)
   6727 * common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
   6728                                                              (line    6)
   6729 * compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  141)
   6730 * constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
   6731 * CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
   6732                                                              (line   19)
   6733 * constructors:                          Options.            (line  511)
   6734 * constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
   6735                                                              (line   19)
   6736 * crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6737 * CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
   6738                                                              (line    9)
   6739 * creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  137)
   6740 * cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  777)
   6741 * cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
   6742                                                              (line   56)
   6743 * current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6744 * data:                                  Output Section Data.
   6745                                                              (line    6)
   6746 * DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
   6747                                                              (line   80)
   6748 * DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  101)
   6749 * DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  107)
   6750 * dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1174)
   6751 * DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1597)
   6752 * default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
   6753 * default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
   6754 * DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   6755 * deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  536)
   6756 * demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
   6757 * demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  818)
   6758 * direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  218)
   6759 * discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
   6760                                                              (line    6)
   6761 * discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6762 * DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1503)
   6763 * DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1628)
   6764 * dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6765 * dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
   6766 * dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
   6767 * dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  831)
   6768 * dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  181)
   6769 * ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6770 * emulation:                             Options.            (line  342)
   6771 * emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
   6772 * END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
   6773 * endianness:                            Options.            (line  200)
   6774 * entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6775 * entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  160)
   6776 * entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
   6777 * ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6778 * error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
   6779 * example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6780 * exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
   6781 * expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6782 * expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
   6783 * expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
   6784 * expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
   6785 * EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6786                                                              (line   13)
   6787 * fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6788 * file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   6789                                                              (line    6)
   6790 * FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   61)
   6791 * filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
   6792                                                              (line    9)
   6793 * fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
   6794                                                              (line    6)
   6795 * FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6796                                                              (line   39)
   6797 * finalization function:                 Options.            (line  252)
   6798 * first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
   6799 * first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
   6800 * FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   44)
   6801 * FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   57)
   6802 * FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
   6803                                                              (line   20)
   6804 * forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
   6805                                                              (line    6)
   6806 * forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
   6807                                                              (line    6)
   6808 * forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  434)
   6809 * FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
   6810 * functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
   6811 * garbage collection <1>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6812 * garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  852)
   6813 * generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  415)
   6814 * GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
   6815 * GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
   6816 * GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
   6817 * grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
   6818 * groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  645)
   6819 * H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
   6820 * header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   6821 * heap size:                             Options.            (line 1539)
   6822 * help:                                  Options.            (line  883)
   6823 * holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
   6824 * holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
   6825                                                              (line   39)
   6826 * HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
   6827 * HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
   6828 * i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
   6829 * image base:                            Options.            (line 1546)
   6830 * implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
   6831                                                              (line    6)
   6832 * import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
   6833 * INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
   6834 * including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
   6835 * including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1348)
   6836 * incremental link:                      Options.            (line  278)
   6837 * INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
   6838                                                              (line   25)
   6839 * initialization function:               Options.            (line  281)
   6840 * initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   6841 * input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
   6842 * input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
   6843                                                              (line    9)
   6844 * input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
   6845 * input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  477)
   6846 * input format:                          Options.            (line  117)
   6847 * input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
   6848 * input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
   6849                                                              (line    6)
   6850 * input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
   6851                                                              (line    6)
   6852 * input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
   6853                                                              (line    6)
   6854 * input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
   6855 * INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
   6856 * INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
   6857                                                              (line   30)
   6858 * insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
   6859                                                              (line   30)
   6860 * integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
   6861 * integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   12)
   6862 * internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
   6863 * invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
   6864 * K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6865 * KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
   6866 * l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6867 * lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
   6868 * ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
   6869 * LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
   6870 * len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6871 * LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   72)
   6872 * LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  135)
   6873 * library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
   6874 * link map:                              Options.            (line  352)
   6875 * link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1063)
   6876 * linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
   6877 * linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
   6878                                                              (line    6)
   6879 * linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
   6880 * linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
   6881 * linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
   6882 * linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
   6883 * linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
   6884 * linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
   6885 * LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
   6886 * little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  203)
   6887 * LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
   6888 * load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   6889 * LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   6890 * loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
   6891                                                              (line   22)
   6892 * local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  540)
   6893 * location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
   6894 * LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6895                                                              (line    6)
   6896 * M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   12)
   6897 * M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
   6898 * machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6899                                                              (line   72)
   6900 * machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
   6901 * mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
   6902 * MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
   6903 * MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6904 * memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   32)
   6905 * memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6906 * memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
   6907                                                              (line    6)
   6908 * memory usage:                          Options.            (line  895)
   6909 * MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
   6910 * Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
   6911 * MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
   6912 * MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
   6913 * NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
   6914 * name, section:                         Output Section Name.
   6915                                                              (line    6)
   6916 * names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
   6917 * naming the output file:                Options.            (line  409)
   6918 * NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   6919 * NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  389)
   6920 * NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  106)
   6921 * NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  113)
   6922 * NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
   6923                                                              (line   56)
   6924 * NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
   6925                                                              (line   22)
   6926 * not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   6927 * o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6928 * objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
   6929 * object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
   6930 * object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
   6931 * object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
   6932 * object size:                           Options.            (line  261)
   6933 * OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  394)
   6934 * opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
   6935 * operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
   6936 * options:                               Options.            (line    6)
   6937 * ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
   6938 * org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6939 * ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   67)
   6940 * ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
   6941 * orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
   6942 * output file after errors:              Options.            (line  965)
   6943 * output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6944 * output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
   6945 * output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
   6946                                                              (line    6)
   6947 * output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
   6948                                                              (line    6)
   6949 * output section data:                   Output Section Data.
   6950                                                              (line    6)
   6951 * OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
   6952 * OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
   6953                                                              (line   72)
   6954 * OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
   6955 * OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
   6956                                                              (line    6)
   6957 * overlays:                              Overlay Description.
   6958                                                              (line    6)
   6959 * partial link:                          Options.            (line  438)
   6960 * PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6961 * PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  119)
   6962 * position independent executables:      Options.            (line  992)
   6963 * PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6964 * PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   30)
   6965 * PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
   6966 * PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   13)
   6967 * PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   44)
   6968 * PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   48)
   6969 * PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
   6970 * PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6971 * PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
   6972 * PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
   6973 * PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
   6974 * PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
   6975 * PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
   6976 * PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
   6977 * PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
   6978 * precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
   6979 * prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
   6980                                                              (line   22)
   6981 * program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6982 * program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
   6983                                                              (line    6)
   6984 * program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
   6985 * program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
   6986 * PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
   6987 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
   6988 * PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
   6989 * QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
   6990                                                              (line    6)
   6991 * quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
   6992 * read-only text:                        Options.            (line  389)
   6993 * read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  394)
   6994 * regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
   6995 * relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
   6996 * relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1006)
   6997 * relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
   6998 * relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
   6999 * relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
   7000 * relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
   7001 * relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
   7002 * relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  438)
   7003 * removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
   7004                                                              (line    6)
   7005 * reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
   7006 * requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
   7007 * retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  425)
   7008 * retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1027)
   7009 * ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   26)
   7010 * round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7011 * round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   36)
   7012 * runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  269)
   7013 * runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1041)
   7014 * runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  196)
   7015 * scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   12)
   7016 * scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
   7017                                                              (line   20)
   7018 * script files:                          Options.            (line  481)
   7019 * scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
   7020 * search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  320)
   7021 * search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
   7022 * SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
   7023 * SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
   7024 * section address:                       Output Section Address.
   7025                                                              (line    6)
   7026 * section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
   7027 * section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   62)
   7028 * section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1329)
   7029 * section data:                          Output Section Data.
   7030                                                              (line    6)
   7031 * section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
   7032                                                              (line    6)
   7033 * section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
   7034 * section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  138)
   7035 * section name:                          Output Section Name.
   7036                                                              (line    6)
   7037 * section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
   7038                                                              (line    6)
   7039 * section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7040 * section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
   7041                                                              (line    6)
   7042 * section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
   7043                                                              (line    6)
   7044 * SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
   7045 * sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
   7046                                                              (line    6)
   7047 * segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1190)
   7048 * SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
   7049 * segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
   7050 * shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1120)
   7051 * SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7052                                                              (line    6)
   7053 * SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
   7054 * SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
   7055 * small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
   7056                                                              (line   20)
   7057 * SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
   7058                                                              (line   58)
   7059 * SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
   7060                                                              (line   54)
   7061 * SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
   7062                                                              (line   46)
   7063 * SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
   7064 * SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7065 * SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
   7066 * SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
   7067 * SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
   7068 * SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
   7069 * SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
   7070 * SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
   7071                                                              (line    6)
   7072 * stack size:                            Options.            (line 1786)
   7073 * standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
   7074 * start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
   7075 * STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
   7076 * strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  468)
   7077 * strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  472)
   7078 * stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1027)
   7079 * STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  124)
   7080 * SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
   7081                                                              (line    6)
   7082 * suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   12)
   7083 * symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  118)
   7084 * symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
   7085 * symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
   7086 * symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  546)
   7087 * symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
   7088 * symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  457)
   7089 * symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  805)
   7090 * symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
   7091 * symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1027)
   7092 * synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1006)
   7093 * synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
   7094 * TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
   7095 * TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   27)
   7096 * TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   32)
   7097 * thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
   7098 * TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
   7099 * traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1169)
   7100 * trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7101 * trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
   7102 * unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
   7103 * undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  503)
   7104 * undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
   7105                                                              (line   13)
   7106 * undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1325)
   7107 * uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
   7108                                                              (line    6)
   7109 * unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
   7110                                                              (line   39)
   7111 * usage:                                 Options.            (line  883)
   7112 * USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   69)
   7113 * using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   42)
   7114 * using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
   7115 * Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  141)
   7116 * variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
   7117 * verbose:                               Options.            (line 1225)
   7118 * version:                               Options.            (line  530)
   7119 * version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
   7120 * version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1231)
   7121 * VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
   7122 * versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
   7123 * VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   78)
   7124 * warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1238)
   7125 * warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1329)
   7126 * warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1325)
   7127 * weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  386)
   7128 * what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
   7129 * wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
   7130                                                              (line    6)
   7131 * Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
   7132 * Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
   7133 
   7134 
   7135 
   7136 Tag Table:
   7137 Node: Top750
   7138 Node: Overview1524
   7139 Node: Invocation2638
   7140 Node: Options3046
   7141 Node: Environment85511
   7142 Node: Scripts87271
   7143 Node: Basic Script Concepts89005
   7144 Node: Script Format91712
   7145 Node: Simple Example92575
   7146 Node: Simple Commands95671
   7147 Node: Entry Point96122
   7148 Node: File Commands96881
   7149 Node: Format Commands100882
   7150 Node: Miscellaneous Commands102848
   7151 Node: Assignments106227
   7152 Node: Simple Assignments106718
   7153 Node: PROVIDE108454
   7154 Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN109659
   7155 Node: Source Code Reference109903
   7156 Node: SECTIONS113483
   7157 Node: Output Section Description115374
   7158 Node: Output Section Name116427
   7159 Node: Output Section Address117303
   7160 Node: Input Section118952
   7161 Node: Input Section Basics119753
   7162 Node: Input Section Wildcards122971
   7163 Node: Input Section Common127704
   7164 Node: Input Section Keep129186
   7165 Node: Input Section Example129676
   7166 Node: Output Section Data130644
   7167 Node: Output Section Keywords133421
   7168 Node: Output Section Discarding136990
   7169 Node: Output Section Attributes138171
   7170 Node: Output Section Type139175
   7171 Node: Output Section LMA140329
   7172 Node: Forced Output Alignment142842
   7173 Node: Forced Input Alignment143110
   7174 Node: Output Section Region143495
   7175 Node: Output Section Phdr143925
   7176 Node: Output Section Fill144589
   7177 Node: Overlay Description145731
   7178 Node: MEMORY150034
   7179 Node: PHDRS154234
   7180 Node: VERSION159273
   7181 Node: Expressions167065
   7182 Node: Constants167943
   7183 Node: Symbols168504
   7184 Node: Orphan Sections169242
   7185 Node: Location Counter170406
   7186 Node: Operators174842
   7187 Node: Evaluation175764
   7188 Node: Expression Section177128
   7189 Node: Builtin Functions178617
   7190 Node: Implicit Linker Scripts186584
   7191 Node: Machine Dependent187359
   7192 Node: H8/300188375
   7193 Node: i960190000
   7194 Node: M68HC11/68HC12191685
   7195 Node: ARM193139
   7196 Node: HPPA ELF32200389
   7197 Node: M68K202012
   7198 Node: MMIX202921
   7199 Node: MSP430204086
   7200 Node: PowerPC ELF32205135
   7201 Node: PowerPC64 ELF64207749
   7202 Node: SPU ELF212165
   7203 Node: TI COFF214797
   7204 Node: WIN32215323
   7205 Node: Xtensa233680
   7206 Node: BFD236802
   7207 Node: BFD outline238257
   7208 Node: BFD information loss239543
   7209 Node: Canonical format242060
   7210 Node: Reporting Bugs246417
   7211 Node: Bug Criteria247111
   7212 Node: Bug Reporting247810
   7213 Node: MRI254849
   7214 Node: GNU Free Documentation License259492
   7215 Node: LD Index279209
   7216 
   7217 End Tag Table
   7218